Hp Cp4005 Users Manual Color LaserJet User Guide ENWW

Color LaserJet CP4005dn c00741486

2015-02-09

: Hp Hp-Cp4005-Users-Manual-548680 hp-cp4005-users-manual-548680 hp pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 282 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HP Color LaserJet CP4005
User Guide
HP Color LaserJet CP4005
User Guide
Copyright and License
© 2006 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
errors or omissions contained herein.
Part number: CB503-90901
Edition 2: 6/2006
Trademark Credits
Adobe® and PostScript® are registered
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Corel® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.
Energy Star® and the Energy Star logo® are
U.S. registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP are
U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Netscape Navigator is a U.S. trademark of
Netscape Communications.
PANTONE® Colors generated may not
match PANTONE-identified standards.
Consult current PANTONE Publications for
accurate color. PANTONE® and other
Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of
Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2000.
HP customer care
Online services
For 24-hour access to information using a modem or Internet connection:
World Wide Web URL: For the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers, updated HP printer software,
product and support information, and printer drivers in several languages can be obtained from
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005. (The sites are in English.)
Go to http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing for information about network printing using
HP Jetdirect print servers.
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for desktop
computing and printing products. ISPE helps you quickly identify, diagnose, and resolve computing and
printing problems. The ISPE tools may be accessed from http://instantsupport.hp.com.
Telephone support
HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. When you call, you will be connected
to a responsive team waiting to help you. For the telephone number for your country/region, see the
flyer that came in the box with the product. You can also visit http://www.hp.com, and then click Contact
HP, and then click Contact HP Worldwide. Before calling HP, have the following information ready:
product name and serial number, date of purchase, and description of the problem.
You can also find support on the Internet at http://www.hp.com. Click the support & drivers block.
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljcp4005_software for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer. The
Web page for the drivers might be in English, but you can download the drivers themselves in several
languages.
For telephone support, see the flyer that came in the box with the printer.
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies
In the United States, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies. In
Canada, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies. In Europe, supplies can be
ordered from http://www.hp.com/supplies. In Asia-Pacific, supplies can be ordered from
http://www.hp.com/paper/.
Accessories can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/go/accessories.
Call 1-800-538-8787 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3154 (Canada).
HP service information
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers, call 1-800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3867 (Canada). For service
for your product, call the customer support number for your country/region. See the flyer that came in
the box with the printer.
HP service agreements
Call 1-800-835-4747 (U.S.) or 1-800-268-1221 (Canada).
Extended Service: 1-800-446-0522
ENWW iii
HP support and information for Macintosh computers
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription
service for driver updates.
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/mac for products designed specifically for the Macintosh user.
iv HP customer care ENWW
Table of contents
1 Printer basics
Quick access to printer information ...................................................................................................... 2
World Wide Web links .......................................................................................................... 2
User guide links ................................................................................................................... 2
Where to look for more information ..................................................................................... 2
Setting up the printer ........................................................................................... 2
Using the printer .................................................................................................. 3
Printer configurations ........................................................................................................................... 4
HP Color LaserJet CP4005n (product number CB503A) .................................................... 4
HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn (product number CB504A) .................................................. 4
Printer features ..................................................................................................................................... 5
Walk around ......................................................................................................................................... 7
Printer software .................................................................................................................................... 9
Software ............................................................................................................................... 9
Software features ................................................................................................ 9
Driver Autoconfiguration ...................................................................................... 9
Update Now ........................................................................................................ 9
HP Driver Preconfiguration ................................................................................. 9
Installing the printing system software ............................................................................... 10
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections ................. 10
Installing the software after the USB cable has been connected ...................... 11
Installing Windows printing system software for networks ................................ 11
Setting up a Windows computer to use the network printer with Windows-
sharing .............................................................................................................. 12
Uninstalling the software .................................................................................................... 12
Removing software from Windows operating systems ..................................... 12
Software for networks ........................................................................................................ 12
HP Web Jetadmin ............................................................................................. 13
Utilities ............................................................................................................................... 13
HP Easy Printer Care Software ......................................................................... 13
Embedded Web server ..................................................................................... 14
Features ........................................................................................... 14
Other components and utilities .......................................................................... 14
Printer drivers ..................................................................................................................................... 16
Supported printer drivers ................................................................................................... 16
Additional drivers ............................................................................................................... 16
Select the correct printer driver .......................................................................................... 17
Printer-driver Help (Windows) ............................................................................................ 17
Gaining access to the printer drivers ................................................................................. 17
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers ............................................................................................. 19
ENWW v
Supported printer drivers ................................................................................................... 19
Gaining access to the printer drivers ................................................................................. 19
Software for Macintosh computers ..................................................................................................... 21
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks ............................................... 21
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB) ..................... 22
To remove software from Macintosh operating systems ................................................... 22
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh .......................................................................................... 23
Opening the HP Printer Utility ............................................................................................ 23
Printing a cleaning page .................................................................................................... 23
Printing a configuration page ............................................................................................. 23
Viewing supplies status ..................................................................................................... 24
Ordering supplies online and using other support features ............................................... 24
Uploading a file to the printer ............................................................................................. 24
Updating the firmware ........................................................................................................ 25
Activating the two-sided printing (duplexing) mode ........................................................... 25
Printing stored jobs ............................................................................................................ 25
Configuring trays ................................................................................................................ 25
Changing network settings ................................................................................................ 26
Opening the embedded Web server .................................................................................. 26
Setting up e-mail alerts ...................................................................................................... 26
Print media specifications ................................................................................................................... 28
Supported media weights and sizes .................................................................................. 28
2 Control panel
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 32
Display ............................................................................................................................... 32
Accessing the control panel from a computer .................................................................... 34
Control panel buttons ......................................................................................................................... 35
Interpreting control panel indicator lights ............................................................................................ 36
Control panel menus .......................................................................................................................... 37
Getting started basics ........................................................................................................ 37
Menu hierarchy ................................................................................................................................... 38
To enter the menus ............................................................................................................ 38
Retrieve job menu .............................................................................................................. 38
Information menu ............................................................................................................... 38
Paper handling menu ......................................................................................................... 39
Configure device menu ...................................................................................................... 39
Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 40
Retrieve job menu .............................................................................................................................. 42
Information menu ............................................................................................................................... 43
Paper handling menu ......................................................................................................................... 44
Configure device menu ...................................................................................................................... 45
Printing menu ..................................................................................................................... 45
Print quality menu .............................................................................................................. 46
System setup menu ........................................................................................................... 48
I/O menu ............................................................................................................................ 51
Resets menu ...................................................................................................................... 51
Diagnostics menu ............................................................................................................................... 53
Changing printer control panel configuration settings ........................................................................ 54
Show IP address ................................................................................................................ 54
vi ENWW
Showing the IP address .................................................................................... 54
Color/black mix .................................................................................................................. 54
Setting the color/black mix ................................................................................ 54
Tray behavior options ........................................................................................................ 55
Setting the printer to use the requested tray ..................................................... 55
Setting manually feed prompt ........................................................................... 56
Setting the printer default for PS defer media ................................................... 56
Setting the printer to use size/type prompt ........................................................ 57
Setting the printer to use another tray ............................................................... 57
Setting the printer to duplex blank pages .......................................................... 57
Setting the printer to rotate images ................................................................... 58
Sleep delay ........................................................................................................................ 58
Setting sleep delay ............................................................................................ 58
Disabling/enabling sleep mode ......................................................................... 59
Wake time .......................................................................................................................... 59
Setting the wake time ........................................................................................ 59
Display brightness ............................................................................................................. 60
Setting the display brightness ........................................................................... 60
Personality ......................................................................................................................... 61
Setting the personality ....................................................................................... 61
Clearable warnings ............................................................................................................ 61
Setting the clearable warnings .......................................................................... 61
Auto continue ..................................................................................................................... 62
Setting auto continue ........................................................................................ 62
Replace supplies ............................................................................................................... 62
Setting replace supplies response .................................................................... 63
Order at .............................................................................................................................. 63
Setting order at response .................................................................................. 63
Color supply out ................................................................................................................. 63
Setting color supply out response ..................................................................... 64
Jam recovery ..................................................................................................................... 64
Setting jam recovery response .......................................................................... 64
RAM disk ........................................................................................................................... 65
Changing RAM disk behavior ............................................................................ 65
Language ........................................................................................................................... 65
Selecting the language ...................................................................................... 65
Selecting the language if the display is in a language you do not
understand ........................................................................................................ 66
Using the printer control panel in shared environments ..................................................................... 67
3 I/O configuration
Network configuration ......................................................................................................................... 70
Configuring TCP/IP parameters ......................................................................................... 70
Manually configuring TCP/IP parameters from the printer control panel .......... 70
Setting an IP address ........................................................................................ 70
Setting the subnet mask .................................................................................... 71
Setting the default gateway ............................................................................... 72
USB configuration .............................................................................................................................. 73
HP Jetdirect print servers ................................................................................................................... 74
Available software solutions .............................................................................................. 74
ENWW vii
Wireless printing ................................................................................................................................. 75
IEEE 802.11 standard ........................................................................................................ 75
4 Printing tasks
Controlling print jobs ........................................................................................................................... 78
Source ............................................................................................................................... 78
Type and size .................................................................................................................... 78
Print setting priorities ......................................................................................................... 78
Selecting print media .......................................................................................................................... 80
Media to avoid ................................................................................................................... 80
Paper that can damage the printer .................................................................................... 80
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode) ............................................................................ 81
Tray 1 sensing ................................................................................................................... 81
Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 sensing ................................................................................... 82
Configuring input trays ....................................................................................................................... 83
Configuring trays when the printer gives a prompt ............................................................ 83
Configuring a tray when loading paper .............................................................................. 83
Configuring a tray to match print job settings .................................................................... 84
Configuring trays using the paper handling menu ............................................................. 84
Configuring Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 for a custom paper size ....................................... 85
Printing from Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) ............................................................................ 86
Loading Tray 1 .................................................................................................. 86
Printing envelopes from Tray 1 .......................................................................................... 87
Loading envelopes into Tray 1 .......................................................................... 87
Printing envelopes ............................................................................................. 88
Printing from Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 .............................................................................. 88
Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 ....................... 89
Loading undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 ................... 91
Loading custom-sized media into Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 ........................................... 93
Printing on special media ................................................................................................................... 95
Transparencies .................................................................................................................. 95
Glossy paper ...................................................................................................................... 95
Colored paper .................................................................................................................... 96
Envelopes .......................................................................................................................... 96
Labels ................................................................................................................................ 96
Heavy paper ...................................................................................................................... 96
HP LaserJet Tough paper .................................................................................................. 97
Preprinted forms and letterhead ........................................................................................ 97
Recycled paper .................................................................................................................. 98
Using features in the printer driver ..................................................................................................... 99
Creating and using quick sets ............................................................................................ 99
Creating and using watermarks ....................................................................................... 100
Resizing documents ........................................................................................................ 100
Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver ......................................................... 101
Using different paper/covers ............................................................................................ 101
Printing a blank first page ................................................................................................ 101
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper ................................................................ 101
Printing on both sides of the paper .................................................................................. 102
To print on both sides by using the duplex-printing accessory ....................... 102
To print on both sides manually ...................................................................... 103
viii ENWW
Layout options for printing on both sides ........................................................ 103
Setting the color options .................................................................................................. 104
Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box ............................................................ 104
Using the Services tab ..................................................................................................... 105
Using features in the Macintosh printer driver .................................................................................. 106
Creating and using presets in Mac OS X ......................................................................... 106
Printing a cover page ....................................................................................................... 106
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper ................................................................ 107
Printing on both sides of the paper .................................................................................. 107
Setting the color options .................................................................................................. 108
Two-sided (duplex) printing .............................................................................................................. 110
Control panel settings for automatic two-sided printing ................................................... 111
To enable or disable two-sided printing from the printer control panel ........... 111
Options for binding two-sided printing jobs ...................................................................... 112
Manual two-sided printing ................................................................................................ 112
Printing booklets .............................................................................................................. 113
Special printing situations ................................................................................................................. 114
Printing a different first page ............................................................................................ 114
Printing a blank back cover .............................................................................................. 114
Printing on custom-size media ......................................................................................... 114
Stopping a print request ................................................................................................... 115
Stopping the current print job from the printer control panel ........................... 115
Stopping the current print job from a software application .............................. 115
Job storage features ......................................................................................................................... 116
Proofing and holding a job ............................................................................................... 116
Printing stored jobs ......................................................................................... 116
Deleting stored jobs ........................................................................................ 116
Private jobs ...................................................................................................................... 117
Printing a private job ....................................................................................... 117
Deleting a private job ...................................................................................... 118
Mopier mode .................................................................................................................... 118
Managing memory ............................................................................................................................ 120
5 Managing the printer
Printer information pages ................................................................................................................. 122
Menu map ........................................................................................................................ 122
Configuration page .......................................................................................................... 122
Supplies status page ....................................................................................................... 123
Usage page ..................................................................................................................... 123
Demo page ...................................................................................................................... 124
Print CMYK samples ........................................................................................................ 124
Print RGB samples .......................................................................................................... 124
File directory .................................................................................................................... 125
PCL or PS font list ........................................................................................................... 125
Event log .......................................................................................................................... 125
Using the embedded Web server ..................................................................................................... 126
Accessing the embedded Web server ............................................................................. 126
Information tab ................................................................................................................. 127
Settings tab ...................................................................................................................... 127
Setting the real-time clock ............................................................................................... 128
ENWW ix
Networking tab ................................................................................................................. 128
Other links ........................................................................................................................ 128
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software ........................................................................................ 129
Supported operating systems .......................................................................................... 129
To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software ..................................................................... 129
HP Easy Printer Care Software sections ......................................................................... 129
6 Color
Using color ....................................................................................................................................... 132
HP ImageREt 3600 .......................................................................................................... 132
Paper selection ................................................................................................................ 132
Color options .................................................................................................................... 132
sRGB ............................................................................................................................... 132
Printing in four colors — CMYK ....................................................................................... 133
CMYK ink set emulation (PostScript only) ....................................................................... 133
Color matching ................................................................................................................................. 134
Sample book color matching ........................................................................................... 134
Printing color samples ..................................................................................................... 134
Managing printer color options on Windows computers ................................................................... 136
Print in grayscale ............................................................................................................. 136
RGB Color (Color Themes) ............................................................................................. 136
Automatic or manual color adjustment ............................................................................ 136
Manual color options ....................................................................................... 137
Restricting color printing .................................................................................................. 138
Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers ................................................................. 139
Print Color as Gray .......................................................................................................... 139
Advanced color options for text, graphics, and photographs ........................................... 139
Halftone options .............................................................................................. 139
Neutral Grays .................................................................................................. 139
RGB Color ....................................................................................................... 140
Edge Control ................................................................................................... 140
7 Maintenance
Managing print cartridges ................................................................................................................. 142
HP print cartridges ........................................................................................................... 142
Non-HP print cartridges ................................................................................................... 142
Print cartridge authentication ........................................................................................... 142
HP fraud hotline ............................................................................................................... 142
Print cartridge storage ..................................................................................................... 143
Print cartridge life expectancy .......................................................................................... 143
Checking the print cartridge life ....................................................................................... 143
Using the printer control panel ........................................................................ 143
Using the embedded Web server .................................................................... 143
Using HP Easy Printer Care Software ............................................................ 143
Using HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................. 143
Changing print cartridges ................................................................................................................. 144
Replacing a print cartridge ............................................................................................... 144
To replace the print cartridge ........................................................................................... 144
Replacing supplies ........................................................................................................................... 147
Locating supplies ............................................................................................................. 147
xENWW
Supply replacement guidelines ........................................................................................ 147
Making room around the printer for replacing supplies .................................................... 148
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies .............................................................. 148
Using the cleaning page ................................................................................................................... 149
Configuring alerts ............................................................................................................................. 152
8 Problem solving
Basic troubleshooting checklist ........................................................................................................ 154
Factors affecting printer performance .............................................................................................. 155
Troubleshooting information pages .................................................................................................. 156
Configuration page .......................................................................................................... 156
Paper path test page ....................................................................................................... 156
Registration page ............................................................................................................. 157
Event log .......................................................................................................................... 157
Control panel message types ........................................................................................................... 158
Status messages ............................................................................................................. 158
Warning messages .......................................................................................................... 158
Error messages ............................................................................................................... 158
Critical error messages .................................................................................................... 158
Control panel messages ................................................................................................................... 159
Message listing ................................................................................................................ 15 9
Paper jams ....................................................................................................................................... 183
Paper jam recovery .......................................................................................................... 183
To disable paper jam recovery ........................................................................ 184
Common causes of paper jams ........................................................................................................ 185
Paper jams ....................................................................................................................... 185
Clearing jams ................................................................................................................................... 186
Jam in Tray 1 ................................................................................................................... 186
Jam in Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 ...................................................................................... 187
Jams in top cover area .................................................................................................... 188
Clearing a jam in the top cover area ............................................................... 189
Clearing other jams .......................................................................................................... 191
Media-handling problems ................................................................................................................. 194
Multiple sheets ................................................................................................................. 194
Incorrect page size .......................................................................................................... 194
Incorrect tray .................................................................................................................... 195
Automatic feed error ........................................................................................................ 195
Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 feed error ................................................................................. 195
Special media feed error .................................................................................................. 196
Envelope printing error .................................................................................................... 197
Output quality ................................................................................................................... 197
Duplexing error ................................................................................................................ 198
Printer response problems ............................................................................................................... 199
Control panel display is blank .......................................................................................... 199
Printer does not print ....................................................................................................... 199
Printer not receiving data ................................................................................................. 200
Printer selection ............................................................................................................... 200
Printer control panel problems ......................................................................................................... 202
Control panel setting ........................................................................................................ 202
Selecting optional Tray 3 ................................................................................................. 202
ENWW xi
Incorrect printer output ..................................................................................................................... 203
Incorrect fonts .................................................................................................................. 203
Symbol sets ..................................................................................................................... 203
Drifting text ....................................................................................................................... 203
Output errors .................................................................................................................... 203
Partial printout .................................................................................................................. 204
Guidelines for printing with different fonts ........................................................................ 204
Software application problems ......................................................................................................... 205
System selection through software .................................................................................. 205
Font selection from software ............................................................................................ 205
Color selection from software .......................................................................................... 205
Optional Tray 3 and duplexer recognition ........................................................................ 206
Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems ................................................................................ 207
Solving problems with Mac OS X. ................................................................................... 207
Color printing problems .................................................................................................................... 210
Printout color error ........................................................................................................... 210
Incorrect shade ................................................................................................................ 210
Missing color .................................................................................................................... 210
Cartridge error ................................................................................................................. 211
Color match error ............................................................................................................. 211
Print quality troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 212
Print quality problems associated with media .................................................................. 212
Overhead transparency defects ....................................................................................... 212
Print quality problems associated with the environment .................................................. 213
Print quality problems associated with jams .................................................................... 213
Print quality troubleshooting pages .................................................................................. 213
Print quality troubleshooting tool ...................................................................................... 213
Calibrating the printer ...................................................................................................... 214
Repetitive defect ruler ...................................................................................................... 214
Print quality defect chart .................................................................................................. 215
Appendix A Working with memory
Printer memory ................................................................................................................................. 222
Installing memory ............................................................................................................................. 223
Installing DDR memory DIMMs ....................................................................................... 223
Enabling memory ............................................................................................................................. 228
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and Windows XP ................................................. 228
Appendix B Supplies and accessories
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers with network connections) ......... 230
Part numbers .................................................................................................................................... 231
Appendix C Service and Support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .................................................................................... 236
Print cartridge limited warranty statement ........................................................................................ 237
Fuser and transfer unit limited warranty statement .......................................................................... 238
HP maintenance agreements ........................................................................................................... 239
On-site service agreements ............................................................................................. 239
Priority on-site service ..................................................................................... 239
xii ENWW
Next-day on-site service .................................................................................. 239
Weekly (volume) on-site service ..................................................................... 239
Appendix D Printer specifications
Physical dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 242
Electrical specifications .................................................................................................................... 243
Acoustic emissions ........................................................................................................................... 244
Environmental specifications ............................................................................................................ 245
Appendix E Regulatory information
FCC regulations ............................................................................................................................... 248
FCC regulations ............................................................................................................... 248
Environmental product stewardship program ................................................................................... 249
Protecting the environment .............................................................................................. 249
Ozone production ............................................................................................................ 249
Power consumption ......................................................................................................... 249
Paper use ........................................................................................................................ 249
Plastics ............................................................................................................................ 249
HP LaserJet print supplies ............................................................................................... 249
Return and recycling instructions ..................................................................................... 250
United States and Puerto Rico ........................................................................ 250
Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges) ........................................ 250
Single returns ................................................................................. 250
Shipping .......................................................................................... 250
Non-US returns ............................................................................................... 250
Paper ............................................................................................................................... 250
Material restrictions .......................................................................................................... 250
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European
Union ............................................................................................................................... 251
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................ 251
For more information ....................................................................................................... 252
Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................. 253
Safety statements ............................................................................................................................. 254
Laser safety ..................................................................................................................... 254
Canadian DOC regulations .............................................................................................. 254
EMI statement (Korea) ..................................................................................................... 254
VCCI statement (Japan) .................................................................................................. 254
AC cordset statement (Japan) ......................................................................................... 254
Laser Statement for Finland ............................................................................................ 255
Glossary ........................................................................................................................................................... 257
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 261
ENWW xiii
xiv ENWW
1 Printer basics
This chapter contains information on setting up your printer and becoming familiar with its features. The
following topics are covered:
●Quick access to printer information
●Printer configurations
●Printer features
●Walk around
●Printer software
●Printer drivers
●Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
●Software for Macintosh computers
●Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
●Print media specifications
ENWW 1
Quick access to printer information
World Wide Web links
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product information and support may be obtained from
the following URLs:
●http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005
Printer drivers may be obtained from the following sites:
●In China: http://www.hp.com.cn/support/cp4005
●In Japan: http://www.jpn.hp.com/support/cp4005
●In Korea: http://www.hp.co.kr/support/cp4005
●In Taiwan: http://www.hp.com.tw/support/cp4005, or the local driver Web site:
http://www.dds.com.tw
To order supplies:
●United States: http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies
●Worldwide: http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html
To order accessories:
●http://www.hp.com/go/accessories
User guide links
For the latest version of the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support/
ljcp4005.
Where to look for more information
Several references are available for use with this printer. See http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
Setting up the printer
Start Guide
Provides step-by-step instructions for installing and setting up the printer. This document is located on
the CD_ROM provided with the printer.
HP Driver Pre-Configuration Guide
For detailed information about configuring printer drivers, go to http://www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw.
2 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
Information about using the embedded Web server is available on the CD-ROM that came with the
printer.
Accessory and Consumable Installation Guides
Provides step-by-step instructions for installing the printer’s accessories and consumables. Supplied
with the printer’s optional accessories and consumables.
Using the printer
CD-ROM User Guide
Provides detailed information on using and troubleshooting the printer. Available on the CD-ROM
included with the printer.
Online Help
Provides information on printer options that are available from within printer drivers. To view a Help file,
access the online Help through the printer driver.
ENWW Quick access to printer information 3
Printer configurations
Thank you for purchasing the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer. This printer is available in two
configurations.
HP Color LaserJet CP4005n (product number CB503A)
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printer is a four-color laser printer that prints up to 30 pages per minute
(ppm) for black and 25 pages per minute (ppm) for color.
●Trays. The printer comes with a multipurpose tray (Tray 1) that holds up to 100 sheets of various
print media or 20 envelopes. A standard 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 2) supports letter, legal,
executive, 8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, and A5, and custom media. The printer also
supports one optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3).
●Connectivity. The printer provides a network port (RJ-45 connector) and universal serial bus
(USB).
●Memory. 128 megabytes (MB) of dual data-rate (DDR) synchronous dynamic random access
memory (SDRAM) in a single DIMM slot that can be upgraded to a maximum of 512 MB.
NOTE To accommodate memory expansion, the available 200-pin small outline dual inline
memory module (SODIMM) slot accepts 128, 256, or 512 MB RAM. The printer can support
up to 512 MB of memory.
HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn (product number CB504A)
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn Series printer includes the features of the CP4005n, plus a duplexer
for automatic two-sided printing, and an additional 128 MB of memory for a total of 258 MB of memory.
4 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Printer features
This printer combines the quality and reliability of Hewlett-Packard printing with the following new
features and standard capabilities. For more information about printer features, see the Hewlett-Packard
Web site at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
Table 1-1 Features
Performance ●Prints up to 30 pages per minute (ppm) in black & white and 25 ppm in color for letter-
sized (8.5"x11") and A4-size paper.
●First page prints in 10 seconds or less for black & white and 12 seconds or less for color
from the Ready prompt. This wait time is similar for first page out times from Powersave
or sleep mode.
Memory ●128 MB of memory for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005n, 256 MB for the HP Color
LaserJet CP4005dn.
NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers use
200-pin small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that accepts 128,
256, or 512 MB RAM. The printer can support up to 512 MB of memory.
User interface ●Four-line graphic display on control panel.
●Enhanced Help with animated graphics.
●Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies (network-connected
printers).
●HP Easy Printer Care Software (a Web-based status and troubleshooting tool).
Supported printer personalities ●HP PCL 6.
●HP PCL 5c.
●PostScript® 3 emulation.
●Portable document format (PDF).
Job storage features ●Full job storage features.
●Personal identification number (PIN) printing. A user can send a print file to the
printer with a PIN embedded in the job print it by typing in the PIN at the control
panel.
●Mopier mode. A print file is processed on the computer and sent one time only to
the printer. It is then spooled at the printer, and the requested numbers of copies
are printed.
●Proof and hold. A multi-copy print file is sent to the printer, the first copy is printed
for proofing, and the remainder of the job is held at the printer for printing or
cancellation.
●Personal identification number (PIN) printing.
●Fonts and forms.
Environmental features ●Sleep mode setting.
●High content of recyclable components and materials.
●Energy Star® compliant.
ENWW Printer features 5
Fonts ●80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript emulation.
●80 printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software
solution.
●Supports forms and fonts on the disk using HP Web Jetadmin.
Paper handling ●Prints on media from 77 mm x 127 mm (3 inches x 5 inches) up to 216 mm x 356 mm
(8.5 inches x 14 inches) (legal size). For ordering information, see Part numbers.
●Tray 1 can process heavy media from 60 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 (16 lb to 60 lb), as well as
standard 80 lb cover stock. For ordering information, see Part numbers.
●Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 can process media from 60 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 (16 lb to 32 lb).
●Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP laser photo media, glossy papers,
and transparencies, as well as heavy stock, labels, and envelopes.
●Prints multiple gloss levels.
●Standard 100-sheet multi-purpose paper tray (Tray 1) supports letter, legal, executive,
8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media.
●Standard 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 2) that supports letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13,
JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media.
●One optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3) support letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13,
JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media.
●Standard 500-sheet face-down output bin.
●Duplexer for automatic two-sided printing (duplexing) standard on the HP Color
LaserJet CP4005dn Series printer.
●Automatic duplexing of 120 g/m2 (32 lb) paper at full speed - 30 sides (15 sheets) per
minute.
Accessories ●Small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMMs).
●Flash memory slot for firmware upgrades.
●Printer stand.
●One optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3).
Connectivity ●USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Device port (Type B connector).
●HP Jetdirect embedded print server to enable network connectivity.
●Optional HP Jetdirect external print servers to enable alternative network connectivity
through the USB port.
Supplies ●Supplies status page contains information on toner level, page count, and estimated
pages remaining.
●High-capacity no-shake cartridge pre-installed in the printer automatic-toner seal
removal feature.
●Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation.
●Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the embedded Web server, Web
Jetadmin network printer software, and HP Easy Printer Care Software. For more
information, see http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare.
Table 1-1 Features (continued)
6 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Walk around
The following illustrations identify the locations and names of key components of this printer.
Figure 1-1 Front view (HP Color LaserJet CP4005dnwith optional 500-sheet feeder shown)
1Duplexer
2Top cover
3Control panel
4Front cover (access to print cartridges, transfer unit, and fuser)
5Tray 1
6On/off switch
7Tray 2
8Optional Tray 3
ENWW Walk around 7
Figure 1-2 Back/side view (HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn with optional 500-sheet feeder shown)
1Formatter board
2Upper formatter board tab
3USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Device port (Type B connector)
4Ethernet Base 10/100T Networking port (RJ-45 connector)
5Lower formatter board tab
6Power cord connection
8 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Printer software
Included with the printer is a CD-ROM containing the printing system software. The software
components and printer drivers on this CD-ROM help you use the printer to its fullest potential. See the
Getting Started Guide for installation instructions.
NOTE For the latest information about the printing system software components, see the
readme file on the Web at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005. For information about installing
the printer software, view the Install Notes on the CD-ROM included with the printer.
This section summarizes the software included on the CD-ROM. The printing system includes software
for end users and network administrators operating in the following operating environments:
●Microsoft® Windows® 2000, XP (32-bit), and XP Pro (64-bit)
●Microsoft Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●Mac OS X v10.2, v10.3, and v10.4
NOTE For a list of the network environments supported by the network administrator software
components, see Network configuration.
NOTE For a list of printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product support information,
go to http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
Software
Software features
Automatic Configuration, Update Now, and Preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color
LaserJet CP4005 Series printer.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000 and
Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of
installation. Some accessories that Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional
paper Tray 3, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). If the environment supports bidirectional
communication, the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installable component by default
for a Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation.
Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printer since installation, the
driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication. Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000
or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that allows HP software to be
customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
ENWW Printer software 9
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators can preconfigure the printing and device
defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more
information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005 and http://www.hp.com/hpdpc_se
Installing the printing system software
The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software.
The printer comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD-ROM. The printing system
software on the CD-ROM must be installed to take full advantage of the printer features.
If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive, you can download the printing system software from the
Internet at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
NOTE You can obtain Model Scripts for Linux by downloading them from the Internet. For Linux
support see http://www.hp.com/go/ljcp4005_software.
You can download the latest software free of charge at http://www.hp.com/go/ljcp4005.
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 2000 and
Windows XP.
When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software before
connecting the USB cable. If the USB cable was connected before the software installation, see Installing
the software after the USB cable has been connected.
Use a USB cable for the direct connection. Use a standard 2 meter (6 foot) USB cable.
Installing the printing system software
1. Close all software programs that are open or running.
2. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
●On the Start menu, click Run.
●Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
●Click OK.
3. When prompted, click Install and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4. Click Finish when the installation has completed.
5. You might need to restart the computer.
6. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files on the
printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005
for help or more information.
10 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Installing the software after the USB cable has been connected
If you have already connected a USB cable to a Windows computer, the New Hardware Found dialog
box appears when you turn on the computer.
Installing the software for Windows 2000 or Windows XP
1. In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search.
2. On the Locate Driver Files screen, select the Specify a Location check box, clear all other check
boxes, and then click Next.
3. Type the letter for the root directory. For example, X:\ (where "X:\" is the letter of the root directory
on the CD-ROM drive).
4. Click Next.
5. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6. Click Finish when installation has completed.
7. Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
8. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files
on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
ljcp4005 for help or more information.
Installing Windows printing system software for networks
The software on the printer CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network. For network
installation on other operating systems, go to http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
The HP Jetdirect embedded print server in the HP Color LaserJet CP4005n or HP Color LaserJet
CP4005dn Series printers includes a 10/100 Base-TX network port. For other available HP Jetdirect
print servers, go to http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirect.
Installing the printing system software
1. If you are installing the software on Windows 2000 or Windows XP make sure that you have
administrator privileges.
2. Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server and printer are properly connected to the network.
Print a configuration page (see Printer information pages). On the second page of the configuration
page, locate the IP address that is currently configured. You might need this address to initially
identify the printer on your network and complete the installation.
3. Close all software programs that are open or running.
4. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
ENWW Printer software 11
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
●On the Start menu, click Run.
●Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
●Click OK.
5. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6. Click Finish when installation has completed.
7. You might need to restart the computer.
8. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files
on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
ljcp4005 for help or more information.
Setting up a Windows computer to use the network printer with Windows-
sharing
If the computer will print directly to the printer, you can share the printer on the network so that other
network users can print to it.
See your Windows documentation to enable Windows-sharing. After the printer is shared, install the
printer software on all computers that share the printer.
Uninstalling the software
This section explains how to uninstall the printing system software.
Removing software from Windows operating systems
Use Add/Remove Programs to select and remove any or all of the Windows HP printing system
components.
1. Click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Add/Remove Programs.
2. Point to HP Color LaserJet CP4005 and then click Change/Remove.
3. Click Uninstaller.
4. Click Next.
5. Select the HP printing system components you want to uninstall.
6. Click OK.
7. Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the uninstallation.
Software for networks
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with
the printer.
12 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin allows you to manage HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your intranet using a
Web browser. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on
a single network administration server. It can be installed and run on these systems:
●Fedora Core and SuSe Linux
●Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and Advanced Server
●Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1
●Windows Server 2003
When installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin can be accessed by any client through a supported
web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0.
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
●Task-oriented user interface provides configurable views, saving network managers significant
time.
●Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function viewed or used.
●Instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other printer problems now route
to different people.
●Remote installation and management from anywhere using only a standard Web browser.
●Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network, without manually entering each printer
into a database.
●Simple integration into enterprise management packages.
●Ability to quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address, color capability, and
model name.
●Ability to easily organize peripherals into logical groups, with virtual office maps for easy navigation.
●Ability to manage and configure multiple printers at once.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and to see the latest list of supported host systems,
visit http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
Utilities
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer is equipped with several utilities that make it easy to
monitor and manage the printer on a network.
HP Easy Printer Care Software
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is a software program that you can use for the following tasks:
●Viewing color usage information
●Checking the printer status
●Checking the supplies status
●Setting up alerts
ENWW Printer software 13
●Viewing printer documentation
●Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools
You can use the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your computer
or when it is connected to a network. The HP Easy Printer Care Software is available at
http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare.
Embedded Web server
This printer is equipped with an embedded Web server, which allows access to information about printer
and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which web programs may run, much
in the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an environment for programs to
run on your computer. The output from these programs can then be displayed by a Web browser, such
as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
When a Web server is "embedded", that means it resides on a hardware device (such as a printer) or
in firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the printer that anyone
can access with a network-connected computer or a standard Web browser. There is no special software
to install or configure. For more information about the HP embedded Web server, see the Embedded
Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with the printer.
Features
The HP embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network card status and manage printing
functions from your computer. With the HP embedded Web server, you can do the following:
●View printer status information.
●Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones.
●View and change tray configurations.
●View and change the printer control panel menu configuration.
●View and print internal pages.
●Receive notification of printer and supplies events.
●Add or customize links to other Web sites.
●Select the language in which to display the embedded Web server pages.
●View and change network configuration.
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see Using
the embedded Web server.
Other components and utilities
Several software applications are available for Windows and Mac OS users, as well as for network
administrators.
14 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Windows Mac OS Network administrator
●Software installer — automates the
printing system installation
●Online Web registration
●PostScript Printer Description files
(PPDs) — for use with the Apple
PostScript drivers that comes with
the Mac OS
●HP Web Jetadmin — A browser-
based system management tool.
See http://www.hp.com/go/
webjetadmin for the latest HP Web
Jetadmin software.
ENWW Printer software 15
Printer drivers
The product comes with software that allows the computer to communicate with the product (by using
a printer language). This software is called a printer driver. Printer drivers provide access to product
features, such as printing on custom-sized paper, resizing documents, and inserting watermarks.
Supported printer drivers
The following printer drivers are provided for the product. If the printer driver that you want is not on the
product CD-ROM or is not available at http://www.hp.com, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the
program that you are using, and request a driver for the product.
NOTE The most recent drivers are available at http://www.hp.com/go/ljcp4005_software.
Depending on the configuration of Windows-based computers, the installation program for the
product software automatically checks the computer for Internet access in order to obtain the
latest drivers.
NOTE For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP Color LaserJet
CP4005 Series printers include a monochrome PCL 6 driver that can be installed for users who
will be printing only black-and-white print jobs.
Operating system
1
PCL 6 printer
driver
2
PCL 5 printer
driver
PS printer driver PPD
3
printer
driver
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac OS X v10.2, v10.3, and v10.4. X
1Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the context-sensitive help in the printer driver
for available features.
2For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers include a
monochrome PCL 6 driver that can be installed for users who print only black-and-white print jobs.
3PostScript (PS) Printer Description files (PPDs)
Additional drivers
The Linux drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet.
You can obtain Model Scripts for Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting them
from an HP-authorized service or support provider. For Linux support go to www.hp.com/go/linux.
16 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Select the correct printer driver
Select a printer driver based on the operating system that you are using and the way that you use the
product. See the printer-driver Help for the features that are available. For information about gaining
access to the printer-driver Help, see Printer-driver Help.
●The PCL 6 printer driver can provide the best overall performance and access to your printer
features.
●The PCL 5 printer driver is recommended for general office monochrome and color printing.
●Use the PostScript (PS) driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript-based programs such
as Adobe PhotoShop and CorelDRAW
®
, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS
flash font support.
NOTE The product automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
Printer-driver Help (Windows)
Printer-driver Help is separate from program Help. The printer-driver help provides explanations for the
buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver. It also includes instructions for
performing common printing tasks, such as printing on both sides, printing multiple pages on one sheet,
and printing the first page or covers on different paper.
Activate the printer-driver Help screens in one of the following ways:
●Click the Help button.
●Press the F1 key on the computer keyboard.
●Click the question-mark symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver.
●Right-click on any item in the driver, and then click What's This?.
Gaining access to the printer drivers
Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer:
Operating System To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job default
settings (for example, turn on
Print on Both Sides by default)
To change the configuration
settings (for example, add a
tray or enable/disable Manual
Duplexing)
Windows 2000, XP,
and Server 2003.
1. On the File menu in the
software program, click
Print.
2. Select the HP Color
LaserJet CP4005, and then
click Properties or
Preferences.
The steps can vary; this
procedure is most common.
1. Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the HP Color
LaserJet CP4005 icon, and
then select Printing
Preferences.
1. Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the HP Color
LaserJet CP4005 icon, and
then select Properties.
3. Click the Device Settings
tab.
ENWW Printer drivers 17
Operating System To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job default
settings (for example, turn on
Print on Both Sides by default)
To change the configuration
settings (for example, add a
tray or enable/disable Manual
Duplexing)
Mac OS X v10.2 1. On the File menu, click
Print.
2. Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
1. On the File menu, click
Print.
2. Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
3. On the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
1. In the Finder, on the Go
menu, click Applications.
2. Open Utilities, and then
open Print Center.
3. Click on the print queue.
4. On the Printers menu,
click Show Info.
5. Click the Installable
Options menu.
NOTE Configuration
settings might not be
available in Classic
mode.
Mac OS X v10.3 and
V10.4
1. On the File menu, click
Print.
2. Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
1. On the File menu, click
Print.
2. Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
3. On the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
1. Open Printer Setup Utility
by selecting the hard drive,
clicking Applications,
clicking Utilities, then
double-clicking Printer
Setup Utility.
2. Click on the print queue.
3. On the Printers menu,
click Show Info.
4. Click the Installable
Options menu.
18 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
The printer comes with printer-driver software that uses a printer language to communicate with the
printer. Printer drivers provide access to printer features, such as printing on custom-sized paper,
resizing documents, and inserting watermarks.
Supported printer drivers
A Macintosh printer driver and the necessary PPD files are included with the printer. If the printer driver
that you want is not on the printer CD, check the installation notes and the late-breaking readme files
to see if the printer driver is supported. If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of
the software program that you are using, and request a driver for the printer.
NOTE The most recent drivers are available at http://www.hp.com/go/ljcp4005_software.
Gaining access to the printer drivers
Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer.
Operating System To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job default
settings (for example, turn on
Print on Both Sides by default)
To change the configuration
settings (for example, add a
physical option such as a tray,
or turn on or off a driver
feature such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
Mac OS X v10.2 1. On the File menu, click
Print.
2. Change any settings that
you want to on the various
pop-up menus.
1. On the File menu, click
Print.
2. Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus, and then,
on the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
1. In the Finder, on the Go
menu, click Applications.
2. Open Utilities, and then
open Print Center.
3. Click on the print queue.
4. On the Printers menu,
click Show Info.
5. Click the Installable
Options menu.
NOTE Configuration
settings might not be
available in Classic
mode.
Mac OS X v10.3 and
v10.4
1. On the File menu, click
Print.
2. Change any settings that
you want to on the various
pop-up menus.
1. On the File menu, click
Print.
2. Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus, and then,
on the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
1. Open Printer Setup Utility
by selecting the hard drive,
clicking Applications,
clicking Utilities, and then
double-clicking Printer
Setup Utility.
2. Click on the print queue.
3. On the Printers menu,
click Show Info.
ENWW Printer drivers for Macintosh computers 19
Operating System To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job default
settings (for example, turn on
Print on Both Sides by default)
To change the configuration
settings (for example, add a
physical option such as a tray,
or turn on or off a driver
feature such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
20 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
4. Click the Installable
Options menu.
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs),
and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
If both the printer and the Macintosh computer are connected to a network, use the printer embedded
Web server (EWS) to configure the printer. For more information, see Using the embedded Web
server.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks
This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing system software
supports Mac OS X v10.2, v10.3, and v10.4.
The printing system software includes the following components:
●PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to printer
features. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the compact disc
(CD) that came with the printer. Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the
computer.
●HP Printer Utility
The HP Printer Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer driver. Use
the illustrated screens to select printer features and complete the following tasks with the printer:
●Name the printer.
●Assign the printer to a zone on the network.
●Assign an internet protocol (IP) address to the printer.
●Download files and fonts.
●Configure and set the printer for IP printing.
You can use the HP Printer Utility when your printer is directly connected using a USB cable or is
connected to a TCP/IP-based network.
NOTE The HP Printer Utility is supported for Mac OS X v10.2, v10.3, and v10.4,
For more information about using the HP Printer Utility, see Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh.
To install printer drivers for Mac OS X v10.2, v10.3, and v10.4
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD
icon on the desktop.
3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
ENWW Software for Macintosh computers 21
5. On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center or
Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE If you are using Mac OS X v10.3 or v10.4, then the Printer Setup Utility has
replaced the Print Center.
6. Click Add Printer.
7. Select Bonjour as the connection type.
8. Select your printer from the list.
9. Click Add Printer.
10. Close the Print Center or the Printer Setup Utility by clicking the close button in the upper-left corner.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections
(USB)
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS X v10.2, v10.3, and v10.4.
The Apple PostScript driver must be installed in order to use the PPD files. Use the Apple PostScript
driver that came with your Macintosh computer.
To install the printing system software
1. Insert the printer CD into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer.
The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD
icon on the desktop.
2. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.
3. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4. When prompted, connect a USB cable between the USB port on the printer and the USB port on
the computer. Use a standard 2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable.
NOTE For Mac OS X v10.2, v10.3, and v10.4: USB queues are created automatically
when the printer is attached to the computer. In some cases, the queue will use a generic
PPD if the installer has not been run before the USB cable is connected. To change the
queue PPD, open the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility, select the correct printer queue,
and then click Show Info to open the Printer Info dialog box. In the pop-up menu, select
Printer Model, and then, in the pop-up menu in which Generic is selected, select the correct
PPD for the printer.
5. Print a test page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking
readme files on the printer CD or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005 for help or more information.
To remove software from Macintosh operating systems
To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.
22 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
Use the HP Printer Utility to configure and maintain a printer from a computer running Mac OS X v10.2,
v10.3, and v10.4, or later. This section describes several functions that you can perform through the
HP Printer Utility.
Opening the HP Printer Utility
The process that you use to start the HP Printer Utility depends on the Macintosh operating system that
you are using.
To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X v10.2, v10.3, v10.4, or later
1. Open the Macintosh HD.
2. Click Library, and then click Printers.
3. Click hp, and then click Utilities.
4. Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.
5. Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utilities.
NOTE If the Printer Setup Utility icon is in the Dock, you can access it by clicking on the
icon.
Printing a cleaning page
Print a cleaning page if the printer is not printing jobs at the expected quality level.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Color Cleaning.
3. Click Print Cleaning Page to print the cleaning page.
Printing a configuration page
Print a configuration page to view the printer settings. For more information about the configuration page,
see Configuration page.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Configuration Page.
3. Click Print Configuration Page to print the configuration page.
ENWW Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 23
Viewing supplies status
View the status of the printer supplies (such as print cartridges, imaging drum, or print media) from a
computer.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Supplies Status.
3. Click the Supplies tab to view the status of various replaceable supplies, and click the Media tab
to view the status of print media.
●To view a more detailed status list, click Detailed Supplies Information. The Supplies
Information dialog box appears.
●To order supplies online, click Order HP Supplies. You must have Internet access in order
to use the online ordering Web page. For more information about online ordering, see Ordering
supplies online and using other support features.
Ordering supplies online and using other support features
Use the HP Web site to order printer supplies, register the printer, get customer support, or learn about
recycling printer supplies. You must have Internet access in order to use the supplies and support Web
pages.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select HP Support.
3. Click one of the following buttons:
●Instant Support: Opens a Web page that you can use to seek technical assistance.
●Order Supplies Online: Opens a Web page that you can use to order printer supplies.
●Online Registration: Opens a Web page that you can use to register the printer.
●Return & Recycle: Opens a Web page that you can use to find information about recycling
used supplies.
Uploading a file to the printer
Send a file from the computer to the printer. The action that the printer takes depends on the type of file
that you send to it. For example, when you send a print-ready file (such as a .PS or .PCL file), the printer
prints the file.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select File Upload.
3. Click Choose, navigate to the file that you want to upload, and then click OK.
4. Click Upload to load the file.
24 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Updating the firmware
Obtain the new firmware files for your printer at http://www.hp.com, and then update the printer firmware
by loading the new firmware file.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Firmware Update.
3. Click Choose, navigate to the firmware file that you want to upload, and then click OK.
4. Click Upload to load the firmware file.
Activating the two-sided printing (duplexing) mode
Turn on the two-sided printing feature on printers equipped with automatic duplexers.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Duplex Mode.
3. Select Enable Duplex Mode to activate the two-sided printing mode, and then click Apply Now.
Printing stored jobs
Turn on the printer job-storing function, or print a stored job from the computer. You also can delete a
stored print job.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Stored Jobs.
3. Perform any of the following tasks:
●To turn on the job-storing function, select Enable Job Storing, and then click Apply Now.
●To print a stored job, select a stored job in the list, type the necessary personal identification
number (PIN) in the Enter Secure Job PIN box, type the number of copies that you want in
the Copies to Print box, and then click Print.
●To delete a stored job, select a stored job in the list, and then click Delete.
Configuring trays
Change the default printer tray settings from the computer.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Trays Configuration.
3. In the Trays list, select the tray to be configured.
NOTE To make the selected tray the default tray for printing, click Make Default.
4. In the Default Media Size pop-up menu, select the default media size for the tray.
ENWW Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 25
5. In the Default Media Type pop-up menu, select the default media type for the tray.
6. Click Apply Now.
Changing network settings
Change the network internet protocol (IP) settings from the computer. You also can open the embedded
Web server to change additional settings. For more information about the embedded Web server,
see Using the embedded Web server.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select IP Settings.
3. Change any of the settings in the following pop-up menus or fields:
●Configuration
●Host Name
●IP Address
●Subnet Mask
●Default Gateway
If you want to change more settings in the embedded Web server, click Additional. The embedded
Web server opens with the Networking tab selected.
4. Click Apply Now.
Opening the embedded Web server
Open the embedded Web server through the HP Printer Utility. For more information about the
embedded Web server, see Using the embedded Web server.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Additional Settings.
3. Click Open Embedded Web Server.
Setting up e-mail alerts
Set up e-mail messages that alert you to certain events that occur with the printer, such as a low toner
level in a print cartridge.
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select E-mail Alerts.
3. Click the Server tab, and, in the SMTP server box, type the server name.
4. Click the Destinations tab, click the add (+) button, and then type the e-mail addresses, mobile
device numbers, or Web site URLs to which you want the e-mail alerts sent.
NOTE If your printer supports e-mail lists, you can make alerts lists for specific events the
same way that you added e-mail addresses.
26 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
5. Click the Events tab, and, in the list, define the events for which an e-mail alert should be sent.
6. To test the alerts setup, click the Server tab, and then click Test. A sample message is sent to the
defined e-mail addresses if the configuration is correct.
7. Click Apply Now.
ENWW Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 27
Print media specifications
For optimum results, use conventional 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) photocopy paper. Verify that the paper is of good
quality and is free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, curls, or bent edges.
●To order supplies in the U.S., go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.
●To order supplies worldwide, go to http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html.
●To order accessories, go to http://www.hp.com/go/accessories.
NOTE Test any media, particularly custom media, before purchasing large quantities to ensure
that it will perform satisfactorily.
Supported media weights and sizes
Table 1-2 Tray 1 media sizes
Tray 1 Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity
Paper and cardstock,
standard sizes (letter/A4,
legal, executive, JIS B5, A5);
custom sizes
Range:
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in) to 216
x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Range:
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 220 g/
m2 (60 lb) bond
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)
Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75
g/m2 (20 lb) bond
Glossy paper (letter/A4, legal,
executive, JIS B5, A5)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
printer.
Range:
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in) to 216
x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Range:
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to 220 g/
m2 (60 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: 10
mm (0.6 in)
Transparencies (letter/A4),
suitable for use in laser
printers
Letter: 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7
in)
Minimum 0.13 mm (0.005 in)
thick
Maximum stack height: 10
mm (0.6 in)
HP Tough paper (letter/A4) Letter: 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7
in)
0.13 mm (0.005 in) thick Maximum stack height: 10
mm (0.6 in)
HP Color Laser Glossy Photo
Paper (letter/A4)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
printer.
Letter: 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7
in)
220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond Maximum stack height: 10
mm (0.6 in)
Envelopes (Com 10,
Monarch, C5, DL, B5)
Range:
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/
m2 (24 lb)bond
20 envelopes
Labels (letter/A4, legal,
executive, JIS B5, A5),
suitable for use in laser
printers
Range:
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in) to 216
x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Maximum 0.23 mm (0.009 in)
thick
Maximum stack height: 10
mm (0.6 in)
28 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
Table 1-3 Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 media sizes
1
Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity
Paper, standard sizes (letter/
A4, legal, executive, JIS B5,
A5); custom sizes
Range:
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in)
to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Range:
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/
m2 (32 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: 56
mm (2.2 in)
Equivalent to 530 sheets of 75
g/m2 (20 lb) bond
Glossy paper (letter/A4, legal,
executive, JIS B5, A5)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
printer.
Range:
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in)
to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Range:
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to 120 g/
m2 (32 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: 56
mm (2.2 in)
HP Color Laser Glossy
Photo & Imaging Paper (letter/
A4)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
printer.
Letter: 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7
in)
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond Maximum stack height: 56
mm (2.2 in)
Transparencies (letter/A4),
suitable for use in laser
printers
Letter: 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7
in)
Minimum:
0.13 mm (0.005 in) thick
Maximum stack height: 56
mm (2.2 in)
HP Tough Paper (letter/A4) Letter: 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7
in)
Maximum:
0.13 mm (0.005 in) thick
Maximum stack height: 56
mm (2.2 in)
Labels (letter/A4 and custom
sizes), suitable for use in laser
printers
Range:
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in)
to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Maximum:
0.13 mm (0.005 in) thick
Maximum stack height: 56
mm (2.2 in)
1Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 use custom sizes specifically for B5 ISO. These trays do not support the range of custom sizes
that can be used in Tray 1.
Table 1-4 Automatic duplex printing (two-sided printing)
Automatic duplex printing Dimensions Weight or thickness
Paper Standard sizes:
Letter: 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7
in)
8.5 x 13: 215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in)
Legal: 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5
x 14 in)
Range:
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/
m2 (32 lb) bond
ENWW Print media specifications 29
Automatic duplex printing Dimensions Weight or thickness
Executive: 184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in)
JIS B5: 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x
10.12 in)
Glossy paper (A4/letter, 13 x
8.5 in, legal, executive, JIS
B5)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
printer.
See above for standard sizes
supported
Range:
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to 120 g/
m2 (32 lb) bond
HP Color Laser Glossy
Photo & Imaging Paper (A4/
letter)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
printer.
Standard sizes:
Letter: 215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5
x 11 in)
A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7
in)
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
Table 1-4 Automatic duplex printing (two-sided printing) (continued)
30 Chapter 1 Printer basics ENWW
2 Control panel
This chapter contains information on the printer control panel, which provides control of printer functions
and communicates information about the printer and print jobs. The following topics are covered:
●Introduction
●Control panel buttons
●Interpreting control panel indicator lights
●Control panel menus
●Menu hierarchy
●Retrieve job menu
●Information menu
●Paper handling menu
●Configure device menu
●Diagnostics menu
●Changing printer control panel configuration settings
●Using the printer control panel in shared environments
ENWW 31
Introduction
The control panel provides control of printer functions and communicates information about the printer
and print jobs. Its display provides graphic information about printer and supplies status, making it easy
to identify and correct problems.
Figure 2-1 Control panel buttons and lights
1Display
2Up arrow ( ) button
3Select ( ) button
4Down arrow ( ) button
5Stop button
6Attention light
7Data light
8Ready light
9Menu button
10 Back/Exit ( ) button
11 Help ( ) button
The printer communicates via the display and the lights on the lower left side of the control panel.
The Ready, Data, and Attention lights provide at-a-glance information about the state of the printer and
alert you to printing problems. The display shows more complete status information as well as menus,
help information, animations, and error messages.
Display
The four-line control panel display gives you complete, timely information about the printer and print
jobs. Graphics illustrate levels of supplies, the locations of paper jams, and job status. Menus give
access to printer functions and detailed status information.
The top-level screen on the display has two areas:
32 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Figure 2-2 Printer display
1Message area
2Prompt area
Figure 2-3 Printer display
1Message area
2Supplies gauge
3Print cartridge colors are indicated from left to right: black, magenta, cyan, and yellow
The message and prompt areas of the display alert you to the state of the printer and tell you how to
respond.
The supplies gauge shows the consumption levels of print cartridges (black, magenta, cyan, and yellow).
A appears instead of the consumption level when the level is not known. This can occur in the following
circumstances:
●Missing cartridges
●Incorrectly placed cartridges
●Cartridges with an error
●Some non-HP cartridges
The supplies gauge appears whenever the printer shows the Ready state with no warnings. It will also
appear when the printer shows a warning or error message concerning a print cartridge or multiple
supplies.
ENWW Introduction 33
Accessing the control panel from a computer
You can also access the printer control panel from a computer by using the Settings page of the
embedded Web server.
The computer shows the same information that the control panel shows. From your computer, you can
also perform control panel functions such as checking supplies status, viewing messages, or changing
tray configuration. For more information, see Using the embedded Web server.
34 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Control panel buttons
Use the buttons on the control panel to perform printer functions and to navigate and respond to menus
and messages in the display.
Button name Function
Select Makes selections and resumes printing after recovery errors.
Up arrow
Down arrow
Navigates menus and text, and increases or decreases the values of numerical items
in the display.
Back/exit arrow Navigates backward in nested menus, or quits menus or help.
Menu Accesses and exits the menus.
Stop Pauses the current job and provides options to resume printing or to cancel the current
job.
Help Provides animated graphics and detailed information on printer messages or menus.
ENWW Control panel buttons 35
Interpreting control panel indicator lights
Figure 2-4 Control panel indicator lights
1Ready
2Data
3Attention
Indicator On Off Flashing
Ready
(green)
Printer is online (able to
accept and process data).
Printer is offline or is turned
off.
Printer is attempting to stop
printing and go offline.
Data
(green)
Processed data is present in
the printer, but more data is
needed to complete the job.
Printer is not processing or
receiving data.
Printer is processing and
receiving data.
Attention
(amber)
A critical error has occurred.
Printer requires attention.
No conditions exist that
require attention.
An error has occurred. Printer
requires attention.
36 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Control panel menus
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the printer driver or software
application. This is the most convenient way to control the printer, and will override the printer control
panel settings. See the help files associated with the software, or for more information on accessing the
printer driver, see Printer software.
You can also control the printer by changing settings in the printer’s control panel. Use the control panel
to access printer features not supported by the printer driver or software application. Use the control
panel to configure trays for paper size and type.
Getting started basics
●Enter the menus and activate any selection by pressing the Menu button.
●Use the Up or Down arrows ( ) to navigate through the menus. In addition to menu navigation,
the Up and Down arrows can increase and decrease numerical value selections. Hold down the
Up or Down arrows to scroll faster.
●The Back button ( ) allows you to move back in menu selections as well as select numerical values
when configuring the printer.
●Exit all menus by pressing Menu.
●If no key is pressed for 60 seconds, the printer will return to the Ready state.
●A lock symbol next to a menu item means a PIN number is needed to use that item. Typically, this
number is obtained from your network administrator.
ENWW Control panel menus 37
Menu hierarchy
The following tables list the hierarchies of each menu.
To enter the menus
Press Menu to enter MENUS.
Press or to navigate the listings.
Press to select the appropriate option.
MENUS RETRIEVE JOB
INFORMATION
PAPER HANDLING
CONFIGURE DEVICE
DIAGNOSTICS
SERVICE
Retrieve job menu
See Retrieve job menu for more information.
RETRIEVE JOB PRINT STORED JOB LIST
USER NAME
ALL PRIVATE JOBS
PRINT
COPIES
DELETE
Information menu
See Information menu for more information.
INFORMATION PRINT MENU MAP
PRINT CONFIGURATION
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE
SUPPLIES STATUS
PRINT USAGE PAGE
PRINT DEMO
PRINT RGB SAMPLES
PRINT CMYK SAMPLES
38 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
PRINT PCL FONT LIST
PRINT PS FONT LIST
Paper handling menu
See Paper handling menu for more information.
PAPER HANDLING TRAY X SIZE
X = 1, 2 or 3
TRAY X TYPE
X = 1, 2 or 3
Configure device menu
See Configure device menu and Changing printer control panel configuration settings for more
information.
CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINTING COPIES
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE
DUPLEX
DUPLEX BINDING
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER
MANUAL FEED
COURIER FONT
WIDE A4
PRINT PS ERRORS
PRINT PDF ERRORS
PCL
PRINT QUALITY ADJUST COLOR
SET REGISTRATION
AUTO SENSE MODE
PRINT MODES
OPTIMIZE
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW
CALIBRATE NOW
ENWW Menu hierarchy 39
COLOR RET
CREATE CLEANING PAGE
PROCESS CLEANING PAGE
AUTO CLEANING
CLEANING INTERVAL
SYSTEM SETUP Date/Time
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
JOB HELD TIMEOUT
SHOW ADDRESS
Restrict Color
COLOR/BLACK MIX
TRAY BEHAVIOR
Sleep Delay
WAKE TIME
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
PERSONALITY
CLEARABLE WARNINGS
AUTO CONTINUE
REPLACE SUPPLIES
ORDER AT
COLOR SUPPLY OUT
JAM RECOVERY
RAM DISK
LANGUAGE
I/O I/O TIMEOUT
Embedded Jetdirect X
(Where X = 1 or 2)
RESETS RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS
SLEEP MODE
Diagnostics menu
See Diagnostics menu for more information.
DIAGNOSTICS PRINT EVENT LOG
SHOW EVENT LOG
40 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE
DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK
PAPER PATH SENSORS
PAPER PATH TEST
MANUAL SENSOR TEST
MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2
COMPONENT TEST
PRINT/STOP TEST
COLOR BAND TEST
ENWW Menu hierarchy 41
Retrieve job menu
The RETRIEVE JOB menu allows you to view listings of all stored jobs.
Menu item Description
PRINT STORED JOB LIST Prints a page that lists all jobs stored on the printer.
Each person who has jobs stored on the printer is listed. The number in
parentheses indicates how many jobs that person has stored.
USER NAME Each user who has stored jobs is listed by name. Select the appropriate user
name to see a list of stored jobs.
ALL PRIVATE JOBS This message is displayed if a user has stored jobs that require a PIN.
PRINT When printing a private job, the user is prompted to enter a PIN.
COPIES The number of copies of the job to be printed. The default is 1.
DELETE When deleting a private job, the user is prompted to enter a PIN.
42 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Information menu
Use the information menu to access and print specific printer information.
Menu item Description
PRINT MENU MAP Prints the control panel menu map, which shows the layout and current
settings of the control panel menu items. See Printer information pages.
PRINT CONFIGURATION Prints the printer configuration page.
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE Prints the estimated remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total
number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge manufacture date, serial
number, page counts, and maintenance information.
SUPPLIES STATUS Displays the status of the print cartridges, fuser kit, and transfer kit in a
scrollable list.
PRINT USAGE PAGE Prints a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer; lists
whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the
page count.
PRINT DEMO Prints a demonstration page.
PRINT RGB SAMPLES Prints color samples for different RGB values. The samples act as a guide
for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer.
PRINT CMYK SAMPLES Prints color samples for different CMYK values. The samples act as a guide
for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer.
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY Prints the name and directory of files stored in the printer.
PRINT PCL FONT LIST Prints the available PCL fonts.
PRINT PS FONT LIST Prints the available PS (emulated PostScript) fonts.
ENWW Information menu 43
Paper handling menu
The paper handling menu allows you to configure input trays by size and type. It is important to correctly
configure the trays with this menu before you print for the first time.
NOTE If you have used other HP LaserJet printer models, you might be accustomed to
configuring Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series
printers, setting the Tray 1 size and type to ANY SIZE is equivalent to First mode. Setting the
size or type for Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY SIZE is equivalent to Cassette mode.
Menu item Value Description
TRAY X SIZE A list of available sizes appears. Allows you to configure the media size for
Tray 1 (X = 1). The default is ANY SIZE.
See Supported media weights and sizes for
a complete list of available sizes.
TRAY X TYPE A list of available types appears. Allows you to configure the media type for
Tray 1 (X = 1). The default is ANY TYPE.
See Supported media weights and sizes for
a complete list of available types.
TRAY X SIZE
X = 2 or optional 3
A list of available sizes appears. Allows you to configure the media size for
Tray 2 or optional Tray 3. The default is
Letter. The media size is detected by the
guides in the tray. See Supported media
weights and sizes for a complete list of
available sizes.
TRAY X TYPE
X = 2 or optional 3
A list of available types appears. Allows you to configure the media type for
Tray 2 or optional Tray 3. The default is
PLAIN. See Supported media weights and
sizes for a complete list of available types.
44 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Configure device menu
The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu allows you to change the default printing settings, adjust the print
quality, change the system configuration and I/O options, and reset the default settings.
Printing menu
These settings affect only jobs without identified properties. Most jobs identify all of the properties and
override the values set from this menu. This menu can also be used to set default media size and type.
Menu item Values Description
COPIES Range:1 - 32000 Allows you to set the default number of
copies. The default number is 1.
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE A list of available sizes appears. Allows you to set the default media size.
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE UNIT OF MEASURE
X DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
Allows you to set the default size for any job
without dimensions. The default unit of
measurement is MILLIMETERS.
DUPLEX OFF
ON
Allows you to enable or disable the duplex
function on models with duplexing
capability. The default is OFF.
DUPLEX BINDING LONG EDGE
SHORT EDGE
Allows you to specify which edge of the
sheet is to be bound when printing duplex
jobs. The default is LONG EDGE.
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER NO
YES
Allows you to set the printer to print an A4
job on letter-size paper when no A4 paper
is loaded. The default is YES.
MANUAL FEED OFF
ON
Allows you to manually feed media. The
default is OFF.
COURIER FONT REGULAR
DARK
Allows you to select a version of the Courier
font. The default is REGULAR.
WIDE A4 NO
YES
Allows you to change the printable area of
A4 paper so that eighty 10-pitch characters
may be printed on a single line. The default
is NO.
PRINT PS ERRORS OFF
ON
Allows you to select to print PS error pages.
The default is OFF.
PRINT PDF ERRORS OFF
ON
Allows you to select to print PDF error
pages. The default is OFF.
PCL FORM LENGTH
ORIENTATION
FONT SOURCE
FONT NUMBER
FONT PITCH
FORM LENGTH: Sets vertical spacing
from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size.
ORIENTATION: Allows you to select
default page orientation to portrait or
landscape.
FONT SOURCE: Selects the font source.
ENWW Configure device menu 45
Menu item Values Description
FONT POINT SIZE
SYMBOL SET
APPEND CR TO LF
SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES
MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING
FONT NUMBER: The printer assigns a
number to each font and lists the numbers
on the PCL font list. The range is 0 to 999.
FONT PITCH: Selects the font pitch. This
item might not appear, depending on the
font selected. The range is 0.44 to 99.99.
FONT POINT SIZE: Selects the font point
size. This appears only if a font with a
scalable point size is selected as the default
font. The range is 4.00 to 999.75.
SYMBOL SET: Selects any one of several
available symbol sets at the printer control
panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of
all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850
is recommended for line-draw characters.
APPEND CR TO LF: Select Yes to append
a carriage return to each line-feed that is
encountered in backward-compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no job control). Some
environments indicate a new line by only
the line-feed control code. Use this option
appends the required carriage return to
each line feed.
SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES: When
generating your own PCL, extra form feeds
are included that would cause a blank page
to be printed. Select Yes for form feeds to
be ignored if the page is blank.
The PCL5 MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING
command selects an input tray by a number
that maps to the various available trays and
feeders.
Print quality menu
This menu allows you to adjust all aspects of print quality, including calibration, registration, and color
halftone settings.
Menu item Values Description
ADJUST COLOR HIGHLIGHTS
MIDTONES
SHADOWS
RESTORE COLOR VALUES
Allows you to modify the half tone settings
for each color. The default for each color
is 0.
SET REGISTRATION PRINT TEST PAGE
Source
ADJUST TRAY X
Shifts the margin alignment to center the
image on the page from top to bottom, and
left to right. You can also align the image
that is printed on the front with the image
that is printed on the back.
46 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Menu item Values Description
PRINT TEST PAGE: Prints a test page that
shows the current registration settings.
Source: Allows you to select the tray for
which you want to print the test page. If
installed, optional trays appear as
selections, where [N] is the number of the
tray.
ADJUST TRAY X: Sets the registration fro
the specified tray, where [N] is the number
of the tray. A selection appears for each
tray that is installed, and registration must
be set for each tray.
●X1 SHIFT: Registration of the image
on the paper from side to side, as the
paper lies in the tray. For duplexing,
this side is the second side (back) of
the paper.
●X2 SHIFT: Registration of the image
on the paper from side to side, as the
paper lies in the tray, for the first side
(front) of a duplexed page. This item
appears only if a duplexer is installed
and enabled. Set the X1 SHIFT first.
●Y SHIFT: Registration of the image on
the paper from top to bottom, as the
paper lies in the tray.
AUTO SENSE MODE TRAY 1 SENSING
TRAY 2-N SENSING
Allows you to set trays to automatically
sense the type of paper loaded. For more
information, see the section entitled
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense
mode).
PRINT MODES A list of available modes appears. Allows you to associate each media type
with a specific print mode.
OPTIMIZE A list of available parameters
appears.
BELT CONTACT
CACO3 PAPER
TALC PAPER
BACKGROUND 1
BACKGROUND 2
TRANSPARENCY
MEDIA TYPE
REGISTRATION
LONG PAPER
PRE-ROTATION
RE-TRANSFER
Allows you to optimize certain parameters
for all jobs rather than optimizing by media
type.
ENWW Configure device menu 47
Menu item Values Description
FUSER TEMP
TRAY 1
RESTORE OPTIMIZE
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW Performs partial printer calibrations.
For more information, see Calibrating the
printer.
CALIBRATE NOW Performs all printer calibrations.
For more information, see Calibrating the
printer.
COLOR RET OFF
ON
The COLOR RET menu item allows you to
turn on or turn off the printer REt
(Resolution Enhancement Technology)
setting. The default is ON.
CLEANING INTERVAL 1000
2000
5000
10000
20000
Select CLEANING INTERVAL to set the
interval for automatic cleaning. The
intervals correspond to the number of
pages that the printer has printed. The
default is 1000.
See Using the cleaning page for more
information.
AUTO CLEANING Off
On
Select AUTO CLEANING to turn automatic
cleaning on or off. The default is Off.
See Using the cleaning page for more
information.
CREATE CLEANING PAGE No value to select. Select CREATE CLEANING PAGE to
create a cleaning page for the HP Color
LaserJet CP4005n printer. The HP Color
LaserJet CP4005dn printer is equipped
with an external duplexer and generates a
cleaning page automatically when
PROCESS CLEANING PAGE is selected.
See Using the cleaning page for more
information.
PROCESS CLEANING PAGE No value to select. Select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE to
process the cleaning page.
See Using the cleaning page for more
information.
System setup menu
The SYSTEM SETUP menu allows you to make changes to general printer configuration default settings
such as sleep mode, printer personality (language), and jam recovery.
See Changing printer control panel configuration settings for more information.
48 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Menu item Values Description
Date/Time DATE
Date Format
TIME
Time Format
Allows you to set various configurations for
the date format when setting the date and
select a 12-hour or 24-hour clock when
setting time.
SHOW ADDRESS AUTO
OFF
This item determines whether the printer’s
IP address is shown on the display with
the Ready message. The default is OFF.
Restrict Color DISABLE COLOR
ENABLE COLOR
COLOR IF ALLOWED
Disables or restricts color use. The default
is ENABLE COLOR. To use the COLOR IF
ALLOWED setting, set up user
permissions through the embedded Web
server, HP Easy Printer Care, and Web
Jetadmin. See Using the embedded Web
server.
COLOR/BLACK MIX AUTO
MOSTLY COLOR PAGES
MOSTLY BLACK PAGES
This menu item establishes how the printer
switches from color to monochrome (black
and white) mode for maximum performance
and print cartridge life.
AUTO will reset the printer to the factory
default setting. The default is AUTO.
Select MOSTLY COLOR PAGES if nearly
all of your print jobs are color with high page
coverage.
Select MOSTLY BLACK PAGES if you
print mostly monochrome print jobs, or a
combination of color and monochrome print
jobs.
TRAY BEHAVIOR USE REQUESTED TRAY
MANUALLY FEED PROMPT
PS DEFER MEDIA
SIZE/TYPE PROMPT
USE ANOTHER TRAY
DUPLEX BLANK PAGES
IMAGE ROTATION
Allows you to specify settings for the tray
selection behavior. (This setting allows you
to configure the trays to behave like trays in
some previous HP printers and to configure
two-sided printing behavior for pre-printed
paper.)
The default for USE REQUESTED TRAY
is EXCLUSIVELY.
The default for USE ANOTHER TRAY is
ENABLED.
The default for MANUALLY FEED
PROMPT is ALWAYS.
PS DEFER MEDIA affects how paper is
handled when printing from an Adobe PS
print driver. ENABLED uses HP’s paper
handling. Disabled uses the Adobe PS
paper handling. The default is ENABLED.
The default for DUPLEX BLANK PAGES
is AUTO.
The default for IMAGE ROTATION is
Standard.
ENWW Configure device menu 49
Menu item Values Description
See Changing printer control panel
configuration settings for more information.
Sleep Delay 1 Minute
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
45 MINUTES
60 MINUTES
90 MINUTES
2 HOURS
4 HOURS
Reduces power consumption when the
printer has been inactive for the selected
period. The default is 30 MINUTES.
WAKE TIME A list of day and hour variables
appears.
When enabled, the default is daily at 7:00
AM. This menu item opens a wizard that
can be used to set the printer wake time.
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS Range is 1 through 10. Sets the brightness of the control panel
display. The default is 5.
PERSONALITY AUTO
PCL
PDF
PS
Sets the default personality to automatic
switching, PCL, PDF, or PostScript
emulation modes. The default is AUTO.
CLEARABLE WARNINGS JOB
ON
Sets whether a warning is cleared on the
control panel or when another job is sent.
The default is JOB.
AUTO CONTINUE OFF
ON
Determines printer behavior when the
system generates an Auto Continuable
error. The default is ON.
REPLACE SUPPLIES STOP AT LOW
STOP AT OUT
OVERRIDE AT OUT
Sets printer behavior when a cartridge is
low. The default is STOP AT LOW. This
option allows the printer to continue printing
until a color supply is exhausted. When the
printer is set to STOP AT OUT, printing
pauses until the color supply is replaced.
OVERRIDE AT OUT allows printing to
continue when a color supply is out, but
displays a warning that override is in use
and that the supply must be replaced.
ORDER AT RANGE=0-100 The user can set the percent remaining at
which the ORDER AT message appears.
The default is 15.
COLOR SUPPLY OUT STOP
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK
Sets the COLOR SUPPLY OUT printer
behavior when a color supply is empty.
When the printer is set to
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK, the printer will
continue printing using black toner only.
The default is STOP.
50 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Menu item Values Description
JAM RECOVERY AUTO
OFF
ON
Sets whether the printer will attempt to
reprint pages after a jam. The default is
AUTO.
RAM DISK AUTO
OFF
Allows you to specify how the RAM disk is
configured. When set to AUTO, the printer
determines the optimal RAM disk size
based on the amount of available memory.
The default is AUTO. This message
displays in models that do not have a hard
disk installed.
LANGUAGE A listing of available languages
appears.
Sets the default language. The default
language is ENGLISH.
I/O menu
This menu allows you to configure the printer’s I/O options.
See Network configuration.
Menu item Values Description
I/O TIMEOUT 15 Seconds
Range: 5 - 300
Allows you to set the printer I/O timeout in
seconds.
EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU The values may vary. Possible
values may include:
TCP/IP
SECURE WEB
RESET SECURITY
LINK SPEED
TCP/IP: Use the TCP/IP menu to configure
basic TCP/IP settings.
SECURE WEB: Specify whether the
embedded Web server accepts
communications by using only secure
HTTP (HTTPS) or by using both HTTP and
HTTPS.
RESET SECURITY: Specifies whether the
current security settings on the print server
are saved or reset to factory defaults.
LINK SPEED: Selects the network link
speed and communication mode for the
10/100T print server. To ensure proper
communication, the Jetdirect settings must
match those of the network.
Resets menu
The RESETS menu allows you to reset factory settings, disable and enable sleep mode, and update
the printer after new supplies are installed.
Menu item Values Description
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS None. Allows you to clear the page buffer, remove
all perishable personality data, reset the
ENWW Configure device menu 51
Menu item Values Description
printing environment, and return all default
settings to factory defaults.
SLEEP MODE Values are ON and OFF. Allows you to enable and disable sleep
mode. The default is ON.
52 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Diagnostics menu
The DIAGNOSTICS menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with
the printer.
Menu item Description
PRINT EVENT LOG This item will print an event log that will display the last 50 entries in the
printer’s event log, starting with the most recent.
SHOW EVENT LOG This item displays the last 50 events on the control panel display, starting with
the most recent.
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING This item prints a Series of 8 pages that include instructions, pages for each
color, a demo page, and a configuration page. These pages can help isolate
print-quality problems.
PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE This item allows you to print a page that can assist in diagnosing printer
problems.
DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK This item allows you to remove a print cartridge to help determine which
cartridge is the source of a problem.
PAPER PATH SENSORS This item performs a test on each of the printer’s sensors to determine if they
are working correctly and displays the status of each sensor.
PAPER PATH TEST This item is useful for testing the paper handling features of the printer, such
as the configuration of the trays.
MANUAL SENSOR TEST This item performs tests to determine whether the paper path sensors are
operating correctly.
MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 This item performs tests to determine whether the paper path sensors are
operating correctly.
COMPONENT TEST This item will activate individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking,
and other hardware issues.
PRINT/STOP TEST This item isolates print quality faults more accurately by stopping the printer
in mid-print cycle. Stopping the printer in mid-print cycle allows you to see
where the image begins to degrade. Stopping the printer in mid-print cycle
will cause a jam that may need to be manually removed. A service
representative should perform this test.
COLOR BAND TEST Use this page to print a color band test page that is used to identify arcing in
the high-voltage power supply.
ENWW Diagnostics menu 53
Changing printer control panel configuration settings
By using the printer control panel, you can make changes to general printer configuration default settings
such as tray size and type, sleep mode, printer personality (language), and jam recovery.
The printer control panel can also be accessed from a computer by using the Settings page of the
embedded Web server. The computer shows the same information that the control panel shows. For
more information, see Using the embedded Web server.
CAUTION Configuration settings seldom need to be changed. Hewlett-Packard recommends
that only the system administrator change configuration settings.
Show IP address
This item determines whether the printer IP address is shown on the display with the Ready message.
Options are AUTO and OFF. The default setting for this option is OFF.
Showing the IP address
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight SHOW ADDRESS.
7. Press to select SHOW ADDRESS.
8. Press or to select the desired option.
9. Press to select the option.
10. Press Menu.
Color/black mix
This item allows you to configure printer settings to optimize printer and cartridge performance for the
printing environment. If the printer is primarily used for black printing (over two-thirds of the pages are
black only), change the printer settings to MOSTLY BLACK PAGES. If the printer is primarily used for
color printing, change the printer settings to MOSTLY COLOR PAGES. If the printer is used for a mix
of black-only and color print jobs, it is recommended that you use the printer default of AUTO. To
determine the percentage of color pages, print a configuration page. See Printer information pages to
learn how to print a configuration page. The configuration page shows the total number of pages printed
and the number of color pages printed. To determine the percentage of color pages printed, divide the
color page count by the total page count.
Setting the color/black mix
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
54 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight COLOR/BLACK MIX.
7. Press to select COLOR/BLACK MIX.
8. Press or to select the desired option.
9. Press to select the option.
10. Press Menu.
Tray behavior options
Tray behavior allows seven user-defined options:
●USE REQUESTED TRAY. Selecting EXCLUSIVELY ensures that the printer will not automatically
select another tray when you indicate that a specific tray should be used. Selecting FIRST allows
the printer to pull from a second tray if the specified tray is empty or does not match the settings
specified for the print job. EXCLUSIVELY is the default setting.
●MANUALLY FEED PROMPT. If you select ALWAYS (the default value), the system always
displays a prompt before pulling from Tray 1 (multipurpose tray). If you select UNLESS
LOADED, the system will only display the prompt if Tray 1 is empty.
●PS DEFER MEDIA. This setting affects how non-HP PostScript drivers will behave with the device.
There is no need to change this setting if using the drivers supplied by HP. If set to ENABLED,
non-HP PostScript drivers will use the HP tray selection method as the HP drivers do. If set to
Disabled, some non-HP PostScript drivers will use the PostScript tray selection method instead
of the HP method.
●SIZE/TYPE PROMPT. This option allows you to control whether or not the tray configuration
message, and corresponding prompt to change type or size is shown when a tray transitions from
opened to closed. Values for this option are Display and DO NOT DISPLAY.
●USE ANOTHER TRAY. This menu item allows you to enable or disable the prompt to select another
tray. Values for this option are ENABLED and Disabled. ENABLED is the default.
●DUPLEX BLANK PAGES. This item allows you to determine how a job is to be duplexed. The
available values are AUTO, which is the default value, and YES. If AUTO is selected, blank pages
within the print job are not duplexed. If YES is selected, any blank pages within the job are duplexed.
Setting the printer to use the requested tray
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.
ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 55
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.
8. Press to select USE REQUESTED TRAY.
9. Press or to select EXCLUSIVELY or FIRST.
10. Press to set the behavior.
11. Press Menu.
Setting manually feed prompt
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.
8. Press to highlight MANUALLY FEED PROMPT.
9. Press to select MANUALLY FEED PROMPT.
10. Press or to select ALWAYS or UNLESS LOADED.
11. Press to set the behavior.
12. Press Menu.
Setting the printer default for PS defer media
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.
8. Press to highlight PS DEFER MEDIA.
9. Press to select PS DEFER MEDIA.
10. Press to select ENABLED or Disabled.
11. Press to set the behavior.
12. Press Menu.
56 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Setting the printer to use size/type prompt
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.
8. Press to highlight SIZE/TYPE PROMPT.
9. Press or to select DISPLAY or DO NOT DISPLAY.
10. Press to set the behavior.
11. Press Menu.
Setting the printer to use another tray
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.
8. Press to highlight USE ANOTHER TRAY.
9. Press or to select ENABLED or Disabled.
10. Press to set the behavior.
11. Press Menu.
Setting the printer to duplex blank pages
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.
ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 57
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.
8. Press to highlight DUPLEX BLANK PAGES.
9. Press or to select AUTO or YES.
10. Press to set the behavior.
11. Press Menu.
Setting the printer to rotate images
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.
8. Press to highlight IMAGE ROTATION.
9. Press or to select STANDARD or ALTERNATE.
10. Press to set the behavior.
11. Press Menu.
Sleep delay
The adjustable sleep mode feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for
an extended period. You can set the length of time before the printer enters sleep mode to
1 MINUTE, 15 MINUTES, 30 MINUTES, 45 MINUTES, 60 MINUTES, 90 MINUTES, 2 HOURS, or
4 HOURS. The default setting is 30 MINUTES.
NOTE The printer display dims when the printer is in sleep mode. This mode does not affect
printer warm-up time.
Setting sleep delay
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight Sleep Delay.
7. Press to select Sleep Delay.
58 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
8. Press or to select the appropriate time period.
9. Press to set the time period.
10. Press Menu.
NOTE If media is loaded in optional Tray 3 when the printer is in sleep mode, the printer
will not sense new media when it comes out of sleep mode. This could cause the printer to
use wrong paper for a print job. Be sure to wake the printer before loading media in optional
Tray 3.
Disabling/enabling sleep mode
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight RESETS.
5. Press to select RESETS.
6. Press to highlight SLEEP MODE.
7. Press to select SLEEP MODE.
8. Press or to select ON or OFF.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
Wake time
The wake time feature allows you to instruct the printer to wake at a certain time on selected days, to
eliminate waiting for the warm-up and calibration periods. You must have SLEEP MODE on to set the
wake time.
To set or change the wake time, use the following steps:
Setting the wake time
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight WAKE TIME.
7. Press to select WAKE TIME.
8. Press or to select the day of the week.
ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 59
9. Press to accept the selection.
10. Press or to select custom or Off.
11. Press to accept the selection.
12. Press or to select the hour.
13. Press to accept the selection.
14. Press or to select the minutes.
15. Press to accept the selection.
16. Press or to select AM or PM.
17. Press to accept the selection.
18. Press to enter APPLY TO ALL DAYS.
19. Press or to select YES or NO.
20. Press to accept the selection.
21. Press or to select the days of the week to which WAKE TIME applies.
22. Press to accept each selection.
23. Press Menu.
Display brightness
The display brightness feature allows you to set the level of brightness for the control panel display. The
allowable range of values is 1 through 10. The default for this feature is 5.
To change or set the display brightness, use the following steps:
Setting the display brightness
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS.
7. Press to select DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS.
8. Press or to highlight the desired value.
9. Press to accept the selection.
10. Press Menu.
60 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Personality
This printer features automatic personality (printer language) switching. AUTO is the default value.
●AUTO configures the printer to automatically detect the type of print job and configure its personality
to accommodate that job.
●PCL configures the printer to use Printer Control Language.
●PDF configures the printer to print PDF files.
●PS configures the printer to use PostScript emulation.
Setting the personality
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight PERSONALITY.
7. Press to select PERSONALITY.
8. Press or to select the appropriate personality (AUTO, PCL, PDF, or PS).
9. Press to set the personality.
10. Press Menu.
Clearable warnings
You can determine the display time of control panel clearable warnings with this option by selecting
ON or JOB. The default value is JOB.
●ON displays clearable warnings until you press .
●JOB displays clearable warnings until the end of the job in which it was generated.
Setting the clearable warnings
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight CLEARABLE WARNINGS.
7. Press to select CLEARABLE WARNINGS.
ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 61
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
Auto continue
You can determine printer behavior when the system generates an Auto Continuable error. ON is the
default setting.
●ON displays an error message for ten seconds before automatically continuing to print.
●OFF pauses printing any time the printer displays an error message and until you press .
Setting auto continue
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight AUTO CONTINUE.
7. Press to select AUTO CONTINUE.
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
Replace supplies
The printer allows three options for handling the printer when a color cartridge is low and should be
replaced. STOP AT LOW is the default value.
●STOP AT OUT pauses printing until the color supply is replaced. The control panel displays a
warning that the supply is low and should be replaced.
●STOP AT LOW allows the printer to continue printing until the color supply is exhausted. The control
panel displays a warning that the supply is out and should be replaced.
●OVERRIDE AT OUT allows printing to continue when a color supply is out, but displays a warning
that override is in use and that the supply must be replaced.
NOTE Using the Override mode may result in unsatisfactory print quality. HP recommends
replacing the supply when the REPLACE SUPPLIES Override in use message is displayed.
HP Supplies Premium Protection Warranty coverage ends when a supply is used in Override
mode.
62 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Setting replace supplies response
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight REPLACE SUPPLIES.
7. Press to select REPLACE SUPPLIES.
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
Order at
This menu option allows you to set the point at which you are reminded to order new supplies. The point
is measured in terms of percent remaining. The allowable range is 0-100. The default is 15.
Setting order at response
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight ORDER AT.
7. Press to select ORDER AT.
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
Color supply out
There are two options for this menu item. The default is STOP.
●STOP causes the printer to stop printing until the empty color supply is replaced.
●AUTOCONTINUE BLACK allows the printer to continue printing using black toner only when a
color supply is empty. A warning message displays on the control panel when the printer is in this
mode. Printing in this mode is allowed only for a specific number of pages. After that, the printer
will pause printing until you replace the empty color supply.
ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 63
Setting color supply out response
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight COLOR SUPPLY OUT.
7. Press to select COLOR SUPPLY OUT.
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
Jam recovery
This option allows you to configure the printer response to paper jams, including how it handles the
pages involved. AUTO is the default value.
●AUTO — the printer automatically turns jam recovery on when sufficient memory is available.
●OFF — the printer will not reprint any page that was involved in a paper jam. Since no memory is
used to store the most recent pages, performance may be optimal.
●ON — the printer reprints any page involved in a paper jam. Additional memory is allocated to store
the last few pages printed, and this might cause overall printer performance to suffer.
Setting jam recovery response
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY.
7. Press to select JAM RECOVERY.
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
64 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
RAM disk
This option allows you to specify how the RAM disk is configured. Options are AUTO and OFF. When
set to AUTO, the printer determines the optimal RAM size based on the amount of available memory.
The message displays only in printer models that do not have a hard disk installed. The default is
AUTO.
Changing RAM disk behavior
You can change this behavior at any time by following these steps:
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight RAM DISK.
7. Press to select RAM DISK.
8. Press or to select AUTO or OFF.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
Language
On some products, the option to set the default language appears when the printer is first initialized.
Use the or arrow to scroll through the available options. When the desired language is highlighted,
press the to set the default language. The default language is ENGLISH.
You may also change the language at any time by following these steps:
Selecting the language
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
7. Press to select LANGUAGE.
8. Press or to select the appropriate language.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Menu.
ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 65
Selecting the language if the display is in a language you do not understand
1. Turn the printer power off.
2. Hold down the key while turning the printer power on until all three lights stay on.
3. Press again.
4. Press or to scroll through the available languages.
5. Press to save the desired language as the new default.
66 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
Using the printer control panel in shared environments
Because your printer is shared with other users, adhere to the following guidelines to ensure successful
printer operation:
●Consult your system administrator before making changes to control panel settings. Changing
control panel settings could affect other print jobs.
●Coordinate with other users before changing the default printer font or downloading soft fonts.
Coordinating these operations conserves memory and avoids unexpected printer output.
●Be aware that switching printer personalities, such as Emulated PostScript or PCL, affects the
printed output of other users.
NOTE Your network operating system may automatically protect each user’s print job from the
effects of other print jobs. Consult your system administrator for more information.
ENWW Using the printer control panel in shared environments 67
68 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW
3 I/O configuration
This chapter describes how to configure certain network parameters on the printer. The following topics
are covered:
●Network configuration
●USB configuration
●HP Jetdirect print servers
●Wireless printing
ENWW 69
Network configuration
You might need to configure certain network parameters on the printer. You can configure these
parameters from installation software, the printer control panel, the embedded Web server, or
management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin.
NOTE For more information about using the embedded Web server, see Using the embedded
Web server.
For more information about supported networks and network configuration tools, see the HP Jetdirect
Print Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server
is installed.
This section contains the instructions for configuring TCP/IP network parameters from the printer control
panel:
Configuring TCP/IP parameters
You can use the printer control panel to configure these TCP/IP parameters:
●IP address (4 bytes)
●Subnet mask (4 bytes)
●Default gateway (4 bytes)
Manually configuring TCP/IP parameters from the printer control panel
Use manual configuration to set an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
Setting an IP address
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight I/O.
5. Press to select I/O.
6. Press to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU.
7. Press to select EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU.
8. Press to highlight TCP/IP.
9. Press , highlight IPV4 SETTINGS, and then press to select IPV4 SETTINGS.
10. Press and select CONFIG METHOD.
11. Press to highlight MANUAL, and then press .
12. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS.
13. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS.
70 Chapter 3 I/O configuration ENWW
14. Press to highlight IP Address:.
15. Press to select IP Address:.
NOTE The first of three sets of numbers is highlighted. If a number is not highlighted, a
highlighted empty underscore appears.
16. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring the IP address.
17. Press to move to the next set of numbers.
18. Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the correct IP address is entered.
19. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state.
Setting the subnet mask
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight I/O.
5. Press to select I/O.
6. Press to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU.
7. Press to select EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU.
8. Press to highlight the TCP/IP menu.
9. Press to select TCP/IP.
10. Press , highlight IPV4 SETTINGS, and then press to select IPV4 SETTINGS.
11. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS.
12. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS.
13. Press to highlight SUBNET MASK.
14. Press to select SUBNET MASK.
NOTE The first of three sets of numbers is highlighted.
15. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring the subnet mask.
16. Press to move to the next set of numbers.
17. Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the correct subnet mask is entered.
18. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state.
ENWW Network configuration 71
Setting the default gateway
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight I/O.
5. Press to select I/O.
6. Press to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU.
7. Press to select EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU.
8. Press to highlight TCP/IP.
9. Press to select TCP/IP.
10. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS.
11. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS.
12. Press to highlight DEFAULT GATEWAY.
13. Press to select DEFAULT GATEWAY.
NOTE The first set of the three sets of numbers shows the default settings. If there is not
a number highlighted, a highlighted empty underscore appears.
14. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring DEFAULT GATEWAY.
15. Press to move to the next set of numbers.
16. Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the correct subnet mask is entered.
17. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state.
72 Chapter 3 I/O configuration ENWW
USB configuration
This printer supports a USB 2.0 connection. The USB port is located on the back of the printer, as shown
in the figure below. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable.
Figure 3-1 USB configuration
1USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Device port (Type B connector)
2USB port
ENWW USB configuration 73
HP Jetdirect print servers
The HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly
to your network at any location. They support multiple network protocols and operating systems.
HP Jetdirect print servers also support the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), which
provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web
Jetadmin software.
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers are equipped with embedded HP Jetdirect print servers.
These servers support Ethernet 10/100T networking for peripherals.
Available software solutions
For a summary of available software solutions, refer to the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s
Guide, or visit http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing.
74 Chapter 3 I/O configuration ENWW
Wireless printing
Wireless networks offer a safe, secure, and cost-effective alternative to traditional wired network
connections.
IEEE 802.11 standard
Optional HP Jetdirect wireless print servers support connection to an 802.11 network. This wireless
technology provides a high-quality printing solution without the physical constraints of wiring.
Peripherals can be conveniently placed anywhere in an office or home and can be easily moved without
changing network cables. Installation is easy with the HP Install Network Printer Wizard.
NOTE HP Jetdirect 802.11 print servers are available for USB connections.
ENWW Wireless printing 75
76 Chapter 3 I/O configuration ENWW
4 Printing tasks
This chapter describes how to perform basic printing tasks. The following topics are covered:
●Controlling print jobs
●Selecting print media
●Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode)
●Configuring input trays
●Printing on special media
●Using features in the printer driver
●Using features in the Macintosh printer driver
●Two-sided (duplex) printing
●Special printing situations
●Job storage features
●Managing memory
ENWW 77
Controlling print jobs
In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull paper
when you send a print job. The Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or
Print Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. If you do not change these settings, the
printer automatically selects a tray using the default printer settings.
Source
Printing by Source means that you choose a specific tray from which you want the printer to pull paper.
The printer tries to print from this tray, no matter what type or size is loaded. If you select a tray that is
configured for a type or size that does not match your print job, the printer does not print automatically.
Instead, it waits for you to load the tray you chose with the type or size of print media for your print job.
If you load the tray, the printer begins printing. If you press , the printer provides options to print from
another tray.
Type and size
Printing by Type or Size means that you want the printer to pull paper or print media from the appropriate
tray loaded with the correct type and size. Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking
out trays and helps protect special media from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for
letterhead and you specify the driver to print on plain paper, the printer will not pull the letterhead from
that tray. Instead, it will pull paper from a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain
paper on the printer control panel. Selecting media by Type and Size results in significantly better print
quality for heavy paper, glossy paper, and transparencies. Using the wrong setting might result in
unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by Type for special print media, such as labels or heavy media.
Print by Size for envelopes, if possible.
●If you want to print by Type or Size, select the type or size from the Page Setup dialog box, the
Print dialog box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the application.
●If you often print on a certain type or size of media, the printer administrator (for a network printer)
or you (for a local printer) can configure a tray for that type or size. Then, when you choose that
type or size as you print a job, the printer pulls media from the tray configured for that type or size.
Print setting priorities
Changes made to print settings are prioritized according to where the changes are made as follows:
NOTE The names of commands and dialog boxes may vary depending on your program.
●Page Setup dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Page Setup or a similar command
on the File menu of the program you are working in. Settings changed here override settings
changed anywhere else.
●Print dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command
on the File menu of the program you are working in. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have
a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.
78 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
●Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver). The printer driver opens when you click
Properties in the Print dialog box. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not
override settings available anywhere else.
●Default printer settings. The default printer settings determine settings used in all print jobs,
unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog boxes, as
described above. There are two ways to change the default printer settings:
1. Click Start, click Settings, click Printers, and then right-click the printer icon. Click Properties and
then click Device Settings.
2. Click Start, click Control Panel, and then select the Printers folder, right-click the printer icon.
Click Properties and then click Device Settings.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
CAUTION To avoid affecting print jobs of other users, make printer setup changes through the
software application or the printer driver whenever possible. Printer setup changes made through
the control panel become default settings for subsequent jobs. Changes made through an
application or the printer driver affect only that specific job.
ENWW Controlling print jobs 79
Selecting print media
You can use many types of paper and other print media with this printer. This section provides guidelines
and specifications for selecting and using different print media. For more information about supported
print media, see Print media specifications.
It is possible that media could meet all of the guidelines in this chapter and still not print satisfactorily.
This may be due to abnormal characteristics of the printing environment or to other variables over which
Hewlett-Packard has no control (for example, extremes in temperature and humidity).
Hewlett-Packard recommends testing any media before buying it in large quantities.
CAUTION Using media that does not conform to the specifications listed here or in the paper
specification guide can cause problems that require service. This service is not covered by the
Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.
Media to avoid
This printer can handle many types of media. Use of media outside the printer’s specifications will cause
a loss of print quality and increase the chance of paper jams.
●Do not use paper that is too rough.
●Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations other than standard 3-hole punched paper.
●Do not use multipart forms.
●Do not use paper that has already been printed on or that has been fed through a photocopier.
●Do not use paper with a watermark if you are printing solid patterns.
Paper that can damage the printer
In rare circumstances, paper can damage the printer. Avoid the following paper to prevent possible
damage to the printer:
●Do not use paper with staples attached.
●Do not use transparencies designed for inkjet printers or other low-temperature printers, or
transparencies designed for monochrome printing. Use only transparencies that are specified for
use with HP Color LaserJet printers.
●Do not use glossy or photo papers intended for inkjet printers.
●Do not use paper that is embossed or coated and is not designed for the temperatures of the image
fuser. Select media that can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
●Do not use letterhead paper with low-temperature dyes or thermography. Preprinted forms or
letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
●Do not use any media that produces undesirable emissions, or that melts, offsets, or discolors
when exposed to 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
To order HP Color LaserJet printing supplies, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies in the United States
or to http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html worldwide.
80 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode)
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers can automatically classify media into one of the following
categories:
●Plain
●Transparency
●Glossy
●Extra-heavy glossy
●Glossy film
●Heavy
●Light
The automatic media type sensor functions only when that tray is configured to Any Type Plain.
Configuring a tray to any other type, such as Bond or Glossy, deactivates the media sensor in that tray.
NOTE Get optimal performance with the automatic media sensing feature when using original
HP media designed for use in HP color LaserJet printers.
Tray 1 sensing
Full sensing (default)
●The printer stops at each page to sense media type.
●This is the best mode for using mixed media in a single print job.
Expanded sensing
●Each time the printer begins a print job, it stops the first page to sense the type.
●The printer assumes that the second and all subsequent pages are of the same media type as the
first page.
●This is the second-fastest mode, and is useful for using stacks of the same media type.
Transparency
●The printer does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies
(Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode).
●This is the fastest mode and is useful for high-volume printing in Normal mode.
ENWW Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode) 81
Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 sensing
Expanded sensing
●The printer stops the first five pages fed from each paper tray to sense the type and averages the
five results.
●The printer assumes that the sixth and all subsequent pages are of the same media type, until the
printer is turned off or goes into sleep mode, or until the tray is opened.
Transparency only (default)
●The printer does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies
(Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode).
●This is the fastest mode and is useful for high-volume printing in Normal mode.
82 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
Configuring input trays
The printer allows you to configure input trays by type and size. You can load different media in the
printer’s input trays and then request media by type or size using the control panel.
NOTE If you have used other HP LaserJet printer models, you might be accustomed to
configuring Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series
printers, setting the Tray 1 size and type to ANY SIZE is equivalent to First mode. Setting the
size or type for Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY SIZE is equivalent to Cassette mode.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, be sure that the media loaded meets the specifications for
duplex printing. (See Supported media weights and sizes.)
NOTE The instructions below are to configure the trays at the printer control panel. You can
also configure the trays from your computer by accessing the embedded Web server. See Using
the embedded Web server.
Configuring trays when the printer gives a prompt
In the following situations, the printer automatically prompts you to configure the tray for type and size:
●When you load paper into the tray
●When you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver or a
software application and the tray is not configured to match the print job settings
The control panel displays the message LOAD TRAY X [TYPE] [SIZE], To change type press .
The instructions below explain how to configure the tray after the prompt appears.
NOTE The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and if Tray 1 is configured
for ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE.
Configuring a tray when loading paper
NOTE If media is loaded in optional Tray 3 when the printer is in sleep mode, the printer will
not sense new media when it comes out of sleep mode. This could cause the printer to use wrong
paper for a print job. Be sure to wake the printer before loading media in optional Tray 3.
1. Load paper in the tray. If you are using Tray 2 or optional Tray 3, close the tray.
2. The printer displays the tray configuration message To change size press .
3. Press to display the TRAY X SIZE= menu.
4. To change the size, press or to highlight the correct size.
5. Press to select the size.
A Setting saved message appears, and then a prompt appears to configure the paper type.
6. To change the type, press or to highlight the correct paper type.
7. Press to select the paper type.
ENWW Configuring input trays 83
A Setting saved message appears, and then the current type and size settings are displayed.
8. If size and type are now correct, press to clear the message.
Configuring a tray to match print job settings
1. In the software application, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type.
2. Send the job to the printer.
If the tray needs to be configured, the LOAD TRAY X: message appears.
3. Load the tray with the correct paper. When the tray is closed, the TRAY X SIZE= appears.
4. If the highlighted size is not correct, press or to highlight the correct size.
5. Press to select the correct size.
A Setting saved message appears, and then a prompt appears to configure the paper type.
6. If the highlighted paper type is not correct, press or to highlight the desired paper type.
7. Press to select the paper type.
A Setting saved message appears, and then the current type and size settings are displayed.
Configuring trays using the paper handling menu
You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the printer. Use the PAPER
HANDLING menu to configure the trays as follows.
Configuring the paper size
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight PAPER HANDLING.
3. Press to select PAPER HANDLING.
4. Press to highlight TRAY X SIZE. (X represents the number of the tray you are configuring.)
5. Press to select TRAY X SIZE.
6. Press or to highlight the correct size.
7. Press to select the correct size.
Configuring the paper type
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight PAPER HANDLING.
3. Press to select PAPER HANDLING.
4. Press to highlight TRAY X TYPE. (X represents the number of the tray you are configuring.)
5. Press to select TRAY X TYPE.
84 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
6. Press or to highlight the correct paper type.
7. Press to select the correct paper type.
A Setting saved message appears, and then the current type and size settings are displayed.
Configuring Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 for a custom paper size
The printer automatically detects many sizes of paper, but you can also configure trays for custom paper
sizes. You must specify the following parameters:
●Unit of measure (millimeters or inches)
●X dimension (the width of the page as it feeds into the printer)
●Y dimension (the length of the page as it feeds into the printer)
1Media width guides
2Media length guides
3Page width (X dimension)
4Page length (Y dimension)
Use the following procedure to configure a tray for a custom size. Once a custom size is set for a tray,
it will be retained until the media length guides are reset.
Setting a custom size in Tray 2 or optional Tray 3
1. Open the tray and place the media face-up in the tray.
2. Set the media length guides to the appropriate non-standard position and close the tray.
3. When the tray configuration message appears, press .
4. Press to change ANY CUSTOM to custom.
5. Press to select custom.
6. Press or to highlight the correct unit (either millimeters or inches).
ENWW Configuring input trays 85
7. Press to select the value.
After the unit of measure is set properly, set the X dimension as follows:
8. Press or to highlight the correct value.
9. Press to select the value. If the value entered is outside the valid range, Invalid value will appear
for two seconds. The display prompts you to enter another value.
After the X dimension is set properly, set the Y dimension as follows:
10. Press or to highlight the correct value.
11. Press to select the value. If the value entered is outside the valid range, Invalid value will appear
for two seconds. The display prompts you to enter another value. The printer displays a message
indicating the dimensions for the custom size.
Printing from Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
Tray 1 is a multipurpose tray that holds up to 100 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper or 20 envelopes. It
provides a convenient way to print envelopes, transparencies, custom-size paper, media heavier than
32 lb, or other types of media without having to unload the other trays.
Loading Tray 1
CAUTION To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.
1. Open Tray 1.
2. Set the side guides to the desired width.
3. Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed facing down and the top of the page facing you.
NOTE Tray 1 can hold approximately 100 sheets of standard 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) office paper.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, see Two-sided (duplex) printing for loading instructions.
86 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
4. Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend the paper.
NOTE Make sure the paper fits under the tabs on the guides and not above the load level
indicators.
Printing envelopes from Tray 1
Many types of envelopes can be printed from Tray 1. Up to 20 envelopes can be stacked in the tray.
Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope.
In the software, set margins at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) from the edge of the envelope.
CAUTION Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick
adhesives, or other synthetic materials can severely damage the printer. To avoid jams and
possible printer damage, never try to print on both sides of an envelope. Before you load
envelopes, make sure they are flat, undamaged, and not stuck together. Do not use envelopes
with pressure-sensitive adhesive.
Loading envelopes into Tray 1
CAUTION To avoid jams, do not remove or insert envelopes during printing.
1. Open Tray 1.
ENWW Configuring input trays 87
2. Load up to 20 envelopes in the center of Tray 1 with the side to be printed facing down and the
postage end toward the printer. Slide the envelopes into the printer as far as they will go without
forcing them.
3. Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes. Make sure the
envelopes fit under the tabs on the guides.
Printing envelopes
1. Specify Tray 1 or select the media source by size in the printer driver.
2. If your software does not automatically format an envelope, specify Landscape for page orientation
in your software application or printer driver. Use the following guidelines to set margins for return
and destination addresses on Commercial #10 or DL envelopes.
Address type Left margin Top margin
Return 5 mm (0.2 inch) 5 mm (0.2 inch)
Destination 102 mm (4.0 inches) 51 mm (2.0 inches)
NOTE For envelopes of other sizes, adjust the margin settings appropriately.
3. Select Print from the software application or printer driver.
Printing from Tray 2 or optional Tray 3
Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 each hold up to 500 sheets of standard paper or a 50.8 mm (2 inch) stack
of labels. Tray 2 stacks above the optional 500-sheet Tray 3, and, when properly installed, the printer
detects optional Tray 3 and shows it as an option in the control panel CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. The
trays adjust for detectable media sizes; letter, legal, A4, A5, JIS B5, and executive; and undetectable
88 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
media sizes: 8.5 x 13 and Executive (JIS), double Japan postcard, and custom. The printer automatically
detects the media size in these trays based on the tray’s paper guide configuration. (See Supported
media weights and sizes.)
CAUTION The paper path for optional Tray 3 passes through Tray 2. If Tray 2 is partially pulled
out or removed, media from optional Tray 3 cannot feed into the printer. The printer will stop and
generate a message that Tray 2 must be installed. Similarly, all installed trays that are above the
tray that is being used must be closed in order for paper to feed into the printer.
Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2 and optional
Tray 3
NOTE If media is loaded in optional Tray 3 when the printer is in sleep mode, the printer will
not sense new media when it comes out of sleep mode. This could cause the printer to use wrong
paper for a print job. Be sure to wake the printer before loading media in optional Tray 3.
The following detectable standard-sized media is supported in Tray 2 and optional Tray 3: letter, legal,
executive, A4, A5, and (JIS) B5.
CAUTION Do not print cardstock, envelopes, heavy or extra heavy paper, or unsupported sizes
of media from the 500-sheet trays. Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do not overfill
the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so can cause jams in the printer.
1. Remove the tray from the printer.
NOTE After sliding the tray out, lift the tray up slightly to remove it.
ENWW Configuring input trays 89
2. Adjust the rear media-length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back
of the tray to the length of the media being used.
3. Slide the media-width guides open to the size for the media you are using.
4. Load media into the tray face up.
NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting or fanning the
ream of paper. Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which could
result in a paper jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if you are using
75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier than
75 g/m
2
(20 lb), the tray will not hold a full ream, and you must reduce the number of sheets
accordingly. Do not overfill the tray because the printer might not pick up the paper.
NOTE If the tray is not properly adjusted, the printer might display an error message or
the media might jam.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, see Two-sided (duplex) printing for loading instructions.
90 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
5. Insert the tray into the printer. The printer will display the tray’s media type and size. If the
configuration is not correct, press the key when the printer prompts you to configure the tray for
type and size. (For more information see Configuring a tray when loading paper.)
6. If the configuration is correct, press to clear the message.
Loading undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2 and optional
Tray 3
CAUTION If media is loaded in optional Tray 3 when the printer is in sleep mode, the printer
will not sense new media when it comes out of sleep mode. This could cause the printer to use
wrong paper for a print job. Be sure to wake the printer before loading media in optional Tray 3.
Undetectable standard-sized media sizes are not marked in the tray, but are listed in the Size menu for
the tray.
The following undetectable standard-sized media is supported in the 500-sheet trays: executive (JIS),
8.5 x 13, double Japan postcard, and 16K.
CAUTION Do not print cardstock, envelopes, heavy or extra heavy paper, or unsupported sizes
of media from the 500-sheet trays. Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do not overfill
the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so can cause paper jams.
1. Remove the tray from the printer.
ENWW Configuring input trays 91
2. Adjust the rear media-length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back
of the tray to the length of the media being used.
3. Slide the media-width guides open to the size for the media you are using.
4. Load media into the tray face up.
NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting or fanning the
ream of paper. Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which could
result in a paper jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if you are using
75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier than
75 g/m
2
(20 lb), the tray will not hold a full ream, and you must reduce the number of sheets
accordingly. Do not overfill the tray because the printer might not pick up the paper.
NOTE If the tray is not properly adjusted, the printer might display an error message or
the media might jam.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, see Two-sided (duplex) printing for loading instructions.
92 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
5. Insert the tray into the printer. The printer will display the tray’s media type and size. If the
configuration is not correct, press the key when the printer prompts you to configure the tray for
type and size. (For more information, see Configuring a tray when loading paper.)
6. If the configuration is correct, press to clear the message.
Loading custom-sized media into Tray 2 and optional Tray 3
To use custom media, you must change the size setting on the control panel to custom and set the unit
of measure, X dimension, and Y dimension. See Configuring a tray to match print job settings for more
information.
1. Remove tray from the printer.
2. Slide the media width guides all the way open and adjust the rear media-length guide to the length
of the paper being used.
ENWW Configuring input trays 93
3. Load media into the tray face up.
NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting or fanning the
ream of paper. Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which could
result in a paper jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if you are using
75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier than
75 g/m
2
(20 lb), the tray will not hold a full ream, and you must reduce the number of sheets
accordingly. Do not overfill the tray because the printer might not pick up the paper.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, see Two-sided (duplex) printing for loading instructions.
4. Slide the media width guides in making sure that they gently touch the paper. Insert the tray into
the printer.
5. Insert the tray into the printer. The printer will display the tray’s type and size configuration. To
specify custom dimensions, or if the type is not correct, press and follow the prompts. To enter
specific dimensions or change the size selection from ANY CUSTOM to custom, see Configuring
a tray to match print job settings.
6. If the configuration is correct, press to clear the message.
94 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
Printing on special media
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media.
NOTE Special media such as envelopes, transparencies, custom-size paper, or heavy media
greater than 120 g/m
2
is used in Tray 1.
To print on any special media, use the following procedure:
1. Load the media in the paper tray.
2. When the printer prompts you for the paper type, select the correct media type for the paper loaded
in the tray. For example, select GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2 when loading HP Color Laser Glossy Photo
Paper.
3. In the software application or the printer driver, set the media type to match the media type that is
loaded in the paper tray.
NOTE For the best print quality, always verify that the media type selected on the printer control
panel and the media type selected in the application or printer driver match the type of media
loaded in the tray.
Transparencies
When printing on transparencies, use the following guidelines:
●Handle transparencies using the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on the transparency can
cause print quality problems.
●Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this printer. Hewlett-Packard
recommends using HP Color Laser Transparencies. HP products are designed to work together
for optimum printing results.
●In either the software application or the driver, select TRANSPARENCY as the media type, or print
from a tray that is configured for transparencies.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
CAUTION Transparencies not designed for LaserJet printing might melt in the printer or wrap
around the fuser, causing damage to the printer.
Glossy paper
●In either the software application or the driver, select GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2, HEAVY GLOSSY,
or INTERMEDIATE90-104 as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
●Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2 for the input tray being used.
●Because this affects all print jobs, it is important to return the printer to its original settings once the
job has printed. See Configuring input trays for more information.
NOTE Hewlett-Packard recommends using HP Color Laser Glossy Photo Paper and soft
glossy papers designed for use in HP color laser printers. HP products are designed to work
together for optimum printing results. If other types of glossy media are used, print quality could
be compromised.
ENWW Printing on special media 95
Colored paper
●Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper.
●Pigments used in colored media must be able to withstand the printer’s fusing temperature of 190°
C (374°F) for 0.1 second without deterioration.
●The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots, overlaying and varying their spacing to
produce various colors. Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the printed
colors.
Envelopes
NOTE Envelopes can be printed only from Tray 1. Set the tray’s media size to the specific
envelope size. See Printing envelopes from Tray 1.
Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure proper printing on envelopes and help prevent
printer jams:
●Do not load more than 20 envelopes into Tray 1.
●The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 90 g/m
2
(24 lb bond).
●Envelopes should be flat.
●Do not use envelopes with windows or clasps.
●Envelopes must not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●Envelopes with peel-off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and
pressures of the printer’s fusing process.
●Envelopes should be loaded face-down and with the postage end feeding into the printer first.
Labels
NOTE For printing labels, set the tray’s media type to LABELS in the printer control panel.
See Configuring input trays. When printing labels, use the following guidelines:
●Verify that the labels’ adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
●Verify that there is no exposed adhesive material between the labels. Exposed areas can cause
labels to peel off during printing, which can cause printer jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause
damage to printer components.
●Do not re-feed a sheet of labels.
●Verify that the labels lie flat.
●Do not use labels that are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Heavy paper
The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers.
96 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
Paper type Paper weight
Heavy and extra-heavy stock 105-163 g/m2
28-43 lb
Cardstock 164-220 g/m2
43-58 lb
Intermediate 90-105 g/m2
24-28 lb
HP Tough paper 5 mil
When printing on heavy paper types, use the following guidelines:
●Use Tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 120 g/m
2
(32 lb).
●For optimum results when printing on heavy paper, use the printer control panel to set the media
type for the tray to HEAVY 105-120 G/M2.
●In either the software application or the driver, select Heavy as the media type, or print from a tray
that is configured for heavy paper.
●Because this setting affects all print jobs, it is important to return the printer back to its original
settings once the job has printed. See Configuring input trays.
CAUTION In general, do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification
recommended for this printer. Doing so can cause misfeeds, paper jams, reduced print quality,
and excessive mechanical wear.
HP LaserJet Tough paper
When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper, use the following guidelines:
●Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper only by the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on
HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print quality problems.
●Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this printer. HP products are designed to work together
for optimum printing results.
●In either the software application or the driver, select TOUGH PAPER as the media type, or print
from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper.
Preprinted forms and letterhead
Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead:
●Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant inks that will not melt, vaporize, or release
undesirable emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing temperature of approximately 190°C
(374°F) for 0.1 second.
●Inks must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers.
ENWW Printing on special media 97
●Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during
storage.
●Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off of preprinted paper.
●To load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 1, load them face down with the top edge of the
page facing toward you.
●To load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or optional Tray 3, load them face up with the
top edge of the page facing away from you.
●When duplex printing, load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or optional 500-sheet Tray
3 face down with the top edge of the page towards you.
Recycled paper
This printer supports the use of recycled paper. Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as
standard paper. Hewlett-Packard recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5% ground
wood.
98 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
Using features in the printer driver
When you print from a software program, many of the product features are available from the printer
driver. For complete information about the features that are available in the printer driver, see the printer-
driver Help. The following features are described in this section:
●Creating and using quick sets
●Creating and using watermarks
●Resizing documents
●Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver
●Using different paper/covers
●Printing a blank first page
●Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
●Printing on both sides of the paper
●Setting the color options
●Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box
●Using the Services tab
NOTE Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel
settings. Software-program settings generally override printer-driver settings.
Creating and using quick sets
Use quick sets to save the current driver settings for reuse. For example, you can save the page
orientation, print on both sides, and paper source settings in a quick set. Quick sets are available on
most printer-driver tabs. You can save up to 25 Print Task Quick Sets.
NOTE The printer driver might report that 25 Print Task Quick Sets have been defined when
fewer than 25 are visible. Some predefined Print Task Quick Sets, which do not apply to your
product, might be included and are counted in the total number.
To create a quick set
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. Select the print settings that you want to use.
3. In the Print Task Quick Sets box, type a name for the selected settings (for example "Quarterly
Report" or "My Project Status").
4. Click Save.
ENWW Using features in the printer driver 99
To use quick sets
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. Select the quick set that you want to use from the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down list.
3. Click OK. The product is now set to print according to the saved settings in the quick set.
NOTE To restore printer-driver default settings, select Default Print Settings from the Print
Task Quick Sets drop-down list.
Creating and using watermarks
A watermark is a notice, such as "Confidential," that is printed in the background of each page of a
document.
To use an existing watermark
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. From the Effects tab, click the Watermarks drop-down list.
3. Click the watermark that you want to use.
4. If you want the watermark to appear only on the first page of the document, click First Page
Only.
5. Click OK. The product is now set to print the watermark that you have selected.
To remove the watermark, click (none) in the Watermarks drop-down list.
Resizing documents
Use the document resizing options to scale a document to a percentage of its normal size. You can also
choose to print a document on a different size paper, with or without scaling.
To reduce or enlarge a document
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. On the Effects tab, type the percentage by which you want to reduce or enlarge your document.
You can also use the scroll bar to adjust the reduce or enlarge percentage.
3. Click OK. The product is now set to scale the document to the reduce or enlarge percentage that
you selected.
To print a document onto a different paper size
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. On the Effects tab, click Print Document On.
3. Select the target paper size to print on.
4. To print the document on the target paper size without scaling it to fit, make sure that the Scale to
Fit option is not selected.
5. Click OK. The product is now set to print the document as you specified.
100 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver
To set a custom paper size
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, click Custom.
3. On the Custom Paper Size window, type the name of the custom paper size.
4. Type the paper-size length and width. If you type a size that is too small or too large, the driver
automatically adjusts the size to the minimum or maximum size that is allowed.
5. If necessary, click the button to change the unit of measure between millimeters and inches.
6. Click Save.
7. Click Close. The product is now set to print the document on the custom-size paper that you
selected. The name that you saved appears in the paper-size list for future use.
Using different paper/covers
Follow these instructions for printing a first page that is different from other pages in the print job.
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, select the appropriate paper for the first page of the print job.
3. Click Use Different Paper/Covers.
4. In the list box, click the pages or covers that you want to print on different paper.
5. To print front or back covers, you must also select Add Blank or Preprinted Cover.
6. Select the appropriate paper type or source for the other pages of the print job. The product is now
set to print the document on the paper that you selected.
NOTE The paper size must be the same for all pages of the print job.
Printing a blank first page
To print a blank first page
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, click Use Different Paper/Covers.
3. In the list box, click Front Cover.
4. Click Add Blank or Preprinted Cover.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature is available in some drivers
and provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
To print more than one page on a sheet of paper, look for a layout or pages-per-sheet option in the
driver. (This is sometimes called 2-up, 4-up, or n-up printing.)
ENWW Using features in the printer driver 101
To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. Click the Finishing tab.
3. In the section for Document Options, select the number of pages that you want to print on each
sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).
4. If the number of pages is greater than 1, select the correct options for Print Page Borders and
Page Order.
●Click Print Page Borders if you want to print a border around each page on the sheet.
●Click Page Order to select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.
5. Click OK. The product is now set to print the number of pages per sheet that you have selected.
Printing on both sides of the paper
When a duplex printing accessory is installed, you can automatically print on both sides of a page. If a
duplex printing accessory is not installed, you can manually print on both sides of a page by feeding the
paper through the product a second time.
NOTE In the printer driver, Print on Both Sides (manually) is available only when no duplex
printing accessory is installed in the product or when the duplex printing accessory does not
support the type of print media being used.
To print on both sides by using the duplex-printing accessory
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●For Tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up, bottom-edge first.
●For all other trays, load the letterhead paper with front side down, and the top edge at the
back of the tray.
CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m
2
(28 lb bond). This could lead
to a Paper Jam in the printer.
2. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
3. For Windows, on the Finishing tab, click Print on Both Sides.
4. Click OK. The product is now ready to print on both sides of the paper.
102 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
To print on both sides manually
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●For Tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up, bottom-edge first.
●For Tray 2 and optional Tray 3, load letterhead paper with front side down, and the top edge
at the back of the tray.
CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m
2
(28 lb bond). Jamming could
result.
2. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
3. On the Finishing tab, select Print on Both Sides (manually).
4. Click OK.
5. Send the print job to the product.
6. Go to the product. Remove any blank paper that is in Tray 1. Insert the printed stack with the printed
side up, and the bottom-edge feeding into the product first. You must print the second side from
Tray 1. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears before feeding the output stack
back into Tray 1 for printing the second half.
7. A prompt might appear on the control-panel display that instructs you to press a button to continue.
Layout options for printing on both sides
The four duplex orientation options are shown below. To select option 1 or 4, select Flip Pages Up in
the printer driver.
1234
1. Long-edge landscape This layout is often used in accounting, data processing, and
spreadsheet programs. Every other printed image is oriented
upside-down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to
bottom.
2. Short-edge landscape Each printed image is oriented right-side-up. Facing pages are
read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top to
bottom on the right page.
ENWW Using features in the printer driver 103
3. Long-edge portrait This is the default setting, and the most common layout used,
with every printed image oriented right-side-up. Facing pages
are read from top to bottom on the first page, then from top to
bottom on the second page.
4. Short-edge portrait This layout is often used with clipboards. Every other printed
image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read
continuously from top to bottom.
Setting the color options
Options on the Color tab control how colors are interpreted and printed from software programs. You
can choose either Automatic or Manual color options. For more information, see Managing printer color
options on Windows computers.
●Select Automatic to optimize the color and halftone used for each element in a document (such
as text, graphics, and photographs). The Automatic setting provides additional color options for
applications and operating systems that support color-management systems. This setting is
recommended for printing all color documents.
●Select Manual to manually adjust the color and halftone modes for text, graphics, and photographs.
If you are using a PCL driver, you can adjust the RGB data. If you are using the PS driver, you can
adjust RGB or CMYK data.
To set the color options
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. Select the Color tab.
3. In the Color Options area, select the option that you want to use.
4. If you selected Manual, click Settings to open the Color Settings dialog box. Adjust the individual
settings for text, graphics, and photographs. You can also adjust the general printing settings.
Click OK.
5. In the Color Themes area, select the RGB Color option that you want to use.
6. Click OK. The product is now set to use the color options that you selected.
Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box
HP Digital Imaging Options make it easy for you to get better photos and images.
NOTE HP Digital Imaging Options are available for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
The following options are available on the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box:
●Contrast Enhancement: Automatically enhance colors and contrast for washed-out photos.
Click Automatic to allow the printer software to intelligently brighten your photo, focusing only on
areas that need adjustment.
●Digital Flash: Adjust the exposure in dark areas of photos to bring out detail. Click Automatic to
allow the printer software to balance lightness and darkness automatically.
104 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
●SmartFocus: Enhance the image quality and clarity of low resolution images such as those
downloaded from the Internet. Click On to allow the printer software to sharpen details in the image
automatically.
●Sharpness: Adjust the image sharpness to your preference. Click Automatic to allow the printer
software to set the level of sharpening for the image automatically.
●Smoothing: Soften an image. Click Automatic to allow the printer software to set the level of
smoothing for the image automatically.
Opening the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then click the HP Digital Imaging button.
NOTE If you installed the HP Image Zone software, you can use it to edit and further enhance
digital photos.
Using the Services tab
NOTE The Services tab is available for Windows XP.
If the product is connected to a network, use the Services tab to obtain product supply-status information
and troubleshooting information. Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device
Status page of the HP Embedded Web Server. This page shows the current status of the product, the
percentage of life remaining for each supply, and information for ordering supplies.
ENWW Using features in the printer driver 105
Using features in the Macintosh printer driver
When you print from a software program, many of the printer features are available from the printer
driver. For complete information about the features that are available in the printer driver, see the printer-
driver Help. The following features are described in this section:
●Creating and using presets in Mac OS X
●Printing a cover page
●Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
●Printing on both sides of the paper
●Setting the color options
NOTE Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel
settings. Software-program settings generally override printer-driver settings.
Creating and using presets in Mac OS X
Use presets to save the current driver settings for reuse. For example, you can save the page orientation,
print-on-both-sides feature, and paper-type settings in a preset.
To create a preset
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. Select the print settings that you want to use.
3. In the Presets box, click Save As..., and type a name for the preset (for example "Quarterly Report"
or "My Project Status").
4. Click OK.
To use presets
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. In the Presets menu, select the preset that you want to use.
NOTE To restore printer-driver default settings, select Standard from the Presets pop-up
menu.
Printing a cover page
If you want to, you can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message (such
as “Confidential”).
106 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
To print a cover page
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. On the Cover Page or Paper/Quality pop-up menu, select whether to print the cover page Before
Document or After Document.
3. If you are using Mac OS X, in the Cover Page Type pop-up menu, select the message that you
want to print on the cover page.
NOTE To print a blank cover page, select Standard as the Cover Page Type.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way
to print draft pages.
To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. Click the Layout pop-up menu.
3. Next to Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2,
4, 6, 9, or 16).
4. If the number of pages is greater than 1, next to Layout Direction, select the order and placement
of the pages on the sheet.
5. Next to Borders, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.
Printing on both sides of the paper
When a duplex printing accessory is installed, you can automatically print on both sides of a page. If a
duplex printing accessory is not installed, you can manually print on both sides of a page by feeding the
paper through the printer a second time.
ENWW Using features in the Macintosh printer driver 107
To print on both sides by using the duplex-printing accessory
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●For Tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up and the bottom-edge feeding into
the printer first.
●For Tray 2 and optional Tray 3, load the letterhead paper with the front side down and the top
edge at the back of the tray.
CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m
2
(28-lb bond). Jamming might
result.
2. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
3. Open the Layout pop-up menu.
4. Next to Two Sided Printing, select either Long-Edge Binding or Short-Edge Binding.
5. Click Print.
To print on both sides manually
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●For Tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up and the bottom-edge feeding into
the printer first.
●For Tray 2 and optional Tray 3, load the letterhead paper with the front side down, and the
top edge at the back of the tray.
CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m
2
(28-lb bond). Jamming might
result.
2. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
3. On the Finishing pop-up menu, select the Manual Duplex option.
NOTE If the Manual Duplex option is not enabled, select Manually Print on 2nd Side.
4. Click Print.
5. Go to the printer. Remove any blank paper that is in Tray 1. Insert the printed stack with the printed
side up and the bottom-edge feeding into the printer first. You must print the second side from
Tray 1. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears before replacing the output stack
in Tray 1 for printing the second half.
6. If a prompt appears on the control-panel display, press a control-panel button to continue.
Setting the color options
Use the Color Options pop-up menu to control how colors are interpreted and printed from software
programs.
108 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
NOTE For more information about using the color options, see Managing printer color options
on Macintosh computers.
To set the color options
1. Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2. Open the Color Options pop-up menu.
3. If you are using Mac OS X, click Show Advanced Options.
4. Manually adjust the individual settings for text, graphics, and photographs.
ENWW Using features in the Macintosh printer driver 109
Two-sided (duplex) printing
Some printer models are capable of duplex printing (printing on both sides of a page). To find out which
models support automatic duplexing, see Printer basics. All printer models support manual duplexing.
NOTE You must specify two-sided printing options in your software application or in the printer
driver in order to print on both sides of the page. If this option is not visible in the software
application or printer driver, use the following information to make duplex printing options
available.
To use two-sided printing:
●Verify that the printer driver is configured to show the two-sided printing options: automatic and/or
manual. For instructions, see the online Help for the printer driver. For more information, see Printer
drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
●Once the two-sided printing option is shown, select the appropriate two-sided printing options in
the printer driver software. Two-sided printing options include page and binding orientation. For
more information about options for binding two-sided printing jobs, see Options for binding two-
sided printing jobs.
●Automatic two-sided printing is not supported for certain media types, including transparencies,
envelopes, labels, heavy, extra heavy, cardstock, and HP Tough paper. (The maximum weight
paper for automatic duplex printing is 120 g/m
2
(32 lb) bond.)
●Automatic two-sided printing supports letter, A4, 8.5 x 13, legal, executive, and JIS B5 paper sizes.
●Manual two-sided printing can support all sizes and more types of media. (Transparencies,
envelopes, and labels are not supported.)
●If both automatic and manual two-sided printing are enabled, the printer will automatically print on
two sides if the size and type are supported by the duplexer. Otherwise, it will manually duplex.
●For best results, avoid two-sided printing with rough-textured, heavy-weight media.
●To load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 1, load them face up with the top edge of the
page facing away from you.
●When duplex printing, load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 face
down with the top edge of the page towards you.
NOTE Loading paper for duplexing is different than loading for one-sided printing.
110 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
Control panel settings for automatic two-sided printing
Many software applications allow you to change two-sided print settings. If your software application or
printer driver does not allow you to adjust two-sided printing settings, you can adjust these settings
through the control panel. The factory default setting is OFF.
CAUTION Do not use two-sided printing when printing on labels. Serious damage could result.
To enable or disable two-sided printing from the printer control panel
NOTE Changing settings for two-sided printing through the printer control panel affects all print
jobs. Whenever possible, change settings for two-sided printing through your software application
or printer driver.
NOTE Any changes made in the printer driver will override settings made using the printer
control panel.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to select PRINTING.
5. Press to highlight DUPLEX.
6. Press to select DUPLEX.
7. Press or to select ON to enable two-sided printing or OFF to disable automatic two-sided
printing.
8. Press to set the value.
9. Press Menu.
10. Select two-sided printing from your software application or printer driver, if possible.
ENWW Two-sided (duplex) printing 111
NOTE To select two-sided printing from the printer driver, the driver must first be properly
configured. For instructions, see the online Help for the printer driver. For more information,
see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
Options for binding two-sided printing jobs
Before printing a two-sided document, use the printer driver to choose the edge on which you will bind
your finished document. Long-edge or book binding is the conventional layout used in book binding.
Short-edge or tablet binding is the typical calendar binding.
NOTE The default binding setting is to bind on the long edge when the page is set up for portrait
orientation. To change to long-edge binding, click the Flip Pages Up check box.
1Long-edge landscape1This layout is often used in accounting, data processing, and
spreadsheet programs. Every other printed image is oriented upside-
down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to bottom.
2Short-edge landscape Each printed image is oriented right-side-up. Facing pages are read from
top to bottom on the left page, then from top to bottom on the right page.
3Long-edge portrait This is the default printer setting, and the most common layout used, with
every printed image oriented right-side-up. Facing pages are read from
top to bottom on the left page, then from top to bottom on the right page.
4Short-edge portrait1This layout is often used with clipboards. Every other printed image is
oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to
bottom.
1
When using Windows drivers, select Flip Pages to see the designated binding options.
Manual two-sided printing
If you want to print on two sides (duplex) on paper other than the supported sizes or weights (for example,
paper heavier than 120 g/m
2
(32 lb) or very thin paper), you will have to go to the printer and reinsert
the paper manually after the first side has printed.
NOTE Damaged or previously used paper can cause paper jams and should not be used.
NOTE Manual two-sided printing is not supported for systems that use the PS driver.
112 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
To manually print on two sides (duplex)
1. Ensure that the printer driver is configured to allow manual duplexing. For more information, see
Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers. In the printer driver, select Allow Manual
Duplex.
2. From the application, open the printer driver.
3. Select the appropriate size and type.
4. On the Finishing tab, click Print on Both Sides or Print on Both Sides (Manually).
5. The default binding option is to bind on the long edge of the paper in portrait layout. To change the
setting, click the Finishing tab, and select the Flip pages up checkbox.
6. Click OK. The Print on Both Sides instructions will appear. Follow the instructions to finish printing
your document.
NOTE If the total number of sheets to be duplexed exceeds the Tray 1 capacity for manual
duplex jobs, feed the top 100 sheets and press . When prompted, feed the next 100 sheets and
press . Repeat as necessary until all the sheets from the output stack have been loaded into
Tray 1.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
Printing booklets
You can use some versions of the printer driver to control the booklet printing when duplexing. You can
select binding on the left or right side on letter, legal, or A4 paper size. Windows 2000 and Windows XP
supports booklet printing for all paper sizes.
See the printer driver online Help for more information about the printing booklets feature.
ENWW Two-sided (duplex) printing 113
Special printing situations
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media.
Printing a different first page
Use the following procedure to print the first page of a document on a different media type than the rest
of the document, for example, to print the first page of a document on letterhead paper and the rest on
plain paper.
1. From your application or printer driver, specify a tray for the first page and another tray for the
remaining pages.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
2. Load the special media into the tray that you specified in step 1.
3. Load the media for the remaining pages of the document into another tray.
You can also print on different media by using the printer control panel or printer driver to set the types
of media that are loaded in the trays and then selecting the first and remaining pages by media type.
Printing a blank back cover
Use the following procedure to print a blank back cover. You can also select an alternate paper source
or print on a different media type than the rest of the document.
1. On the printer driver’s Paper tab, select Use different paper, then from the drop-down list,
select Back Cover, check Add a blank back cover, and then click OK.
2. For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
You can also select an alternate paper source or print a blank back cover on a different media type than
the rest of the document. If desired, select a different source and type from the drop-down lists.
Printing on custom-size media
The printer supports single-sided printing on custom-size media. Tray 1 supports media sizes from
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 support media
sizes from 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) (A5 size) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
When printing on custom-size media, if Tray 1 is configured in the printer control panel as TRAY X
TYPE= ANY TYPE and TRAY X SIZE= ANY SIZE, the printer will print on whatever media is loaded in
the tray. When printing on custom-size media from Tray 2 or optional Tray 3, adjust the switch on the
tray to the custom position, and from the control panel, set the media size to custom or ANY
CUSTOM.
In some software programs and printer drivers, you can specify custom paper-size dimensions. You can
configure custom paper sizes from the printer driver’s Paper tab or Forms tab (Windows 2000 and
Windows XP). Be sure to set the correct paper size in both the Page Setup and Print dialog boxes.
For more information about how to access the printer drivers, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for
Macintosh computers.
If your software application requires you to calculate margins for custom-size paper, see the online Help
for that application.
114 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
Stopping a print request
You can stop a print request either from the printer control panel or from your software application. To
stop a print request from a computer on a network, see the online Help for the specific network software.
NOTE It may take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job.
Stopping the current print job from the printer control panel
1. Press Stop on the printer control panel to pause the job that is currently printing. The control panel
menu provides the option to resume printing or to cancel the current job.
2. Press Menu to exit the menu and resume printing.
3. Press to cancel the job.
Pressing Stop does not affect subsequent print jobs that are stored in the printer buffer.
Stopping the current print job from a software application
A dialog box will appear briefly on the control panel display, giving you the option to cancel the print job.
If several requests have been sent to the printer through an application, the print jobs might be waiting
in a print queue (for example, in Windows Print Manager). See the application documentation for specific
instructions on canceling a print request from the computer.
If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler (Windows 2000 or Windows
XP), delete the print job there.
For Windows 2000 or Windows XP, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. Double-click
the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer icon to open the print spooler. Select the print job you
that want to cancel and then press Delete. If the print job is not canceled, you might need to shut down
and restart the computer.
ENWW Special printing situations 115
Job storage features
Use the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer job-storage feature lets to store a job in the printer’s
memory for printing at a later time. The job storage features use random access memory (RAM).
To support job storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print PostScript
(PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory.
NOTE To use the Private Job, Proof and Hold, and Mopy features, the printer must have a
minimum of 256 MB DDR.
CAUTION Make sure to uniquely identify jobs in the printer driver before printing. Using default
names may override previous jobs with the same default name or cause the job to be deleted.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
Proofing and holding a job
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then
print additional copies. This option stores the print job on the printer hard disk or in printer RAM memory,
and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints
correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job from the printer control panel. The number
of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel.
To permanently store the job and prevent the printer from deleting it, select the Stored Job option in
the driver.
Printing stored jobs
1. Press Menu to enter MENUS.
RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.
3. Press to highlight your USER NAME.
4. Press to select your USER NAME.
5. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.
6. Press to select the JOB NAME.
PRINT is highlighted.
7. Press to select PRINT.
8. Press or to select the number of copies.
9. Press to print the job.
Deleting stored jobs
When you send a stored job, the printer overwrites any previous jobs with the same user and job name.
If there is not a job already stored under the same user and job name, and the printer needs additional
space, the printer may delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest. The default number of jobs that
116 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
can be stored is 32. You can change the number of jobs that can be stored from the control panel. For
more information about setting the job storage limit, see Configure device menu.
A job can be deleted from the control panel, from the embedded Web server, or from HP Web Jetadmin.
To delete a job from the control panel, use the following procedure:
1. Press Menu to enter MENUS.
RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.
3. Press to highlight your USER NAME.
4. Press to select your USER NAME.
5. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.
6. Press to select the JOB NAME.
7. Press to highlight DELETE.
8. Press to select DELETE.
9. Press to delete the job.
Private jobs
This option allows you to send a print job directly to the printer memory. Selecting Private Job activates
the PIN field. The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN in the printer control panel. After the
job is printed, the printer removes the job from the printer memory.
This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to
leave in an output bin after printing. Private Job stores the print job in printer RAM memory. After it is
released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed,
you have to reprint the job from the program.
If you send a second private job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing
private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job,
regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if power to the printer is turned off.
NOTE A lock symbol next to a job name indicates that the job is private.
Specify that a job is private from the driver. Select the Private Job option and type a four-digit PIN. To
avoid overwriting jobs with the same name, also specify a username and job name.
Printing a private job
1. Press Menu to enter MENUS.
RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.
3. Press to highlight your USER NAME.
4. Press to select your USER NAME.
ENWW Job storage features 117
5. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.
6. Press to select the JOB NAME.
PRINT is highlighted.
7. Press to select PRINT.
8. Press or to select the first digit of the PIN.
9. Press to select the digit. The number changes to an asterisk.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to enter the remaining three digits of the PIN.
11. Press when finished entering the PIN.
12. Press or to select the number of copies.
13. Press to print the job.
Deleting a private job
A private job can be deleted from the printer control panel. You can delete a job without printing it, or it
will be automatically deleted after it is printed.
1. Press Menu to enter MENUS.
RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.
2. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.
3. Press to highlight your USER NAME.
4. Press to select your USER NAME.
5. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.
6. Press to select the JOB NAME.
7. Press to highlight DELETE.
8. Press to select DELETE.
9. Press or to select the first digit of the PIN.
10. Press to select the digit. The number changes to an asterisk.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 to enter the remaining three digits of the PIN.
12. Press when finished entering the PIN.
13. Press to delete the job.
Mopier mode
When Mopier mode is enabled, the printer produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases printer performance and reduces network traffic by
sending the job to the printer once, then storing it in the printer’s RAM. The remainder of the copies are
printed at the printer’s fastest speed. Documents can be created, controlled, managed, and finished
from the desktop, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
118 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers support mopying when they have sufficient total memory
(128 MB DDR). The mopying feature is enabled by default if the Mopier Mode setting is Enabled on
the Device Settings tab.
ENWW Job storage features 119
Managing memory
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers support up to 544 MB of memory: 512 MB DDR. You
can add additional memory by installing dual data-rate (DDR) memory. To accomodate for memory
expansion, the printer has one DDR slot, which accepts 128, 256, or 512 MB of RAM. For information
about installing memory, see Working with memory.
NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers use 200-pin small
outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128, 256, or 512 MB of RAM.
The printer features Memory Enhancement Technology (MEt), which automatically compresses page
data to provide the most efficient use of the printer’s RAM.
The printer uses DDR SODIMM. Extended data output (EDO) DIMMs are not supported.
NOTE If memory problems occur when you are printing complex graphics, you can make more
memory available by removing downloaded fonts, style sheets, and macros from printer memory.
Reducing the complexity of a print job from within an application can help avoid memory
problems.
120 Chapter 4 Printing tasks ENWW
5 Managing the printer
This chapter describes how to manage the printer. The following topics are covered:
●Printer information pages
●Using the embedded Web server
●Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software
ENWW 121
Printer information pages
From the printer control panel, you can print pages that give details about the printer and its current
configuration. The procedures for printing the following information pages are described here:
●Menu map
●Configuration page
●Supplies status page
●Usage page
●Demo page
●Print RGB samples
●Print CMYK samples
●File directory
●PCL or PS font list
●Event log
Menu map
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the control panel, print a control panel
menu map.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. If PRINT MENU MAP is not highlighted, press or until it is highlighted.
5. Press to select PRINT MENU MAP.
The message Printing... MENU MAP appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the menu
map. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the menu map.
You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference. The content of the menu map
varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer. (Many of these values can be
overridden from the printer driver or software application.)
For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see Menu hierarchy.
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer problems, or to
verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
122 Chapter 5 Managing the printer ENWW
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
The message Printing... CONFIGURATION appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the
configuration page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page.
NOTE If the printer is configured with an HP Jetdirect print server an additional configuration
page will print that provides information about those devices.
Supplies status page
The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies:
●Print cartridges (all colors)
●Transfer unit
●Fuser
To print the supplies status page:
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.
5. Press to select PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.
The message Printing... SUPPLIES STATUS appears on the display until the printer finishes printing
the supplies status page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the supplies status page.
NOTE If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page will not show the remaining
life for those supplies. For more information, see Non-HP print cartridges.
Usage page
The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer. This page
count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side, the number that were printed on two
sides (duplexed), and totals of the two printing methods for each media size. It also lists the average
percentage of page coverage for each color.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT USAGE PAGE.
5. Press to select PRINT USAGE PAGE.
The message Printing... USAGE PAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the
usage page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the usage page.
ENWW Printer information pages 123
Demo page
A demo page is a representation of a color photograph that demonstrates print quality.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT DEMO.
5. Press to select PRINT DEMO.
The message Printing... DEMO PAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the demo
page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page.
Print CMYK samples
Use the PRINT CMYK SAMPLES page to print CMYK color samples to match the color values in your
application.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES.
5. Press to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES.
The message Printing... CMYK SAMPLES appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the
sample pages. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the pages.
Print RGB samples
Use the PRINT RGB SAMPLES page to print RGB color samples to match the color values in your
application.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT RGB SAMPLES.
5. Press to select PRINT RGB SAMPLES.
The message Printing... RGB SAMPLES appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the
sample pages. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the pages.
124 Chapter 5 Managing the printer ENWW
File directory
The file directory page contains information for all installed mass storage devices. This option does not
appear if no mass storage devices are installed.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT FILE DIRECTORY.
5. Press to select PRINT FILE DIRECTORY.
The message Printing... FILE DIRECTORY appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the
file directory page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the file directory page.
PCL or PS font list
Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the printer. (The font lists also show which
fonts are resident on an optional hard disk accessory or flash DIMM.)
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST.
5. Press to select PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST.
The message Printing... FONT LIST appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the font
list page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the font list page.
Event log
The event log lists the printer events, including printer jams, service errors, and other printer conditions.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG.
5. Press to select PRINT EVENT LOG.
The message Printing... EVENT LOG appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the event
log. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log.
ENWW Printer information pages 125
Using the embedded Web server
NOTE When the printer is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care
Software to view the printer status.
When the printer is directly connected to a computer, the embedded Web server is supported for
Windows 2000 and later.
When the printer is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available. You
can access the embedded Web server from Windows 2000 and later, or through the Apple Safari
browser.
The embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network status and to manage printing
functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel. Below are examples of what you
can do using the embedded Web server:
●View printer control status information.
●Set the type of paper loaded in each tray.
●Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones.
●View and change tray configurations.
●View and change the printer control panel menu configuration.
●View and print internal pages.
●Receive notification of printer and supplies events.
●View and change network configuration.
●Restrict access to color printing. (See http://www.hp.com/go/coloraccess for setup instructions.)
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, or Netscape
Navigator 6.2 or later. The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based
network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based printer connections. You do not have
to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server. For more information about the HP
embedded Web server, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the
CD-ROM included with the printer.
Accessing the embedded Web server
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address for the printer. (To find the IP
address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see Printer
information pages.)
NOTE Once you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the
future.
1. The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer:
the Information tab, the Settings tab, and the Networking tab. Click the tab that you want to view.
2. See the following sections for more information about each tab.
126 Chapter 5 Managing the printer ENWW
Information tab
The Information pages group consists of the following pages.
●Device Status. This page displays the printer status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies,
with 0% representing that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print media
set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change Settings.
●Configuration page. This page shows the information found on the printer configuration page.
●Supplies Status. This page shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% representing that a
supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new supplies, click Order
Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window. To visit any Web site, you must
have Internet access.
●Event log. This page shows a list of all printer events and errors.
●Usage page. This page shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed, grouped
by size and type.
●Device Information. This page also shows the printer network name, address, and model
information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.
●Control panel. This page shows an image of the text currently appearing on the printer’s control
panel display.
Settings tab
This tab allows you to configure the printer from your computer. The Settings tab can be password
protected. If this printer is networked, always consult with the printer administrator before changing
settings on this tab.
The Settings tab contains the following pages.
●Configure Device. Configure all printer settings from this page. This page contains the traditional
menus found on printers using a control panel display. These menus include Information, Paper
Handling, and Configure Device.
●Alerts. Network only. Set up to receive e-mail alerts for various printer and supplies events. Alerts
may also be sent to a URL.
●E-mail. Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e-
mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.
●Security. Set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and Networking
tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server.
●Other Links. Add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is displayed in the Other
Links area on all embedded Web server pages. These permanent links always appear in the Other
Links area: HP Instant Support™, Order Supplies, and Product Support.
●Device Information. Name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name and e-
mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer.
●Language. Determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information.
ENWW Using the embedded Web server 127
●Time Services. Configure the printer’s time settings.
●Restrict Color. Set user color print job restrictions. For more information on restricting and
reporting color usage, see http://www.hp.com/go/coloraccess.
Setting the real-time clock
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is
attached to stored print jobs, so that you can identify the most recent versions of stored print jobs.
When setting the clock, you can set the date format, date, time format, and time.
Networking tab
This tab allows the network administrator to control network-related settings for the printer when it is
connected to an IP-based network. This tab will not appear if the printer is directly connected to a
computer, or if the printer is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print
server.
Click Help on the Networking tab pages for more information on network settings.
Other links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet to order supplies or obtain product support.
You must have Internet access to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not
connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these
Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.
●HP Instant Support™. Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This service
analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support
information specific to your printer.
●Order Supplies. Click this link to connect to the HP Web site and order genuine HP supplies, such
as print cartridges and paper.
●Product Support. Connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printer. Then,
you can search for help regarding general topics.
128 Chapter 5 Managing the printer ENWW
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is an application that you can use for the following tasks:
●View color usage information.
●Check the printer status.
●Check supplies status.
●Set up alerts.
●Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools.
You can use the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your computer
or when it is connected to a network. To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software go to http://www.hp.com/
go/easyprintercare.
NOTE You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Easy Printer Care
Software. However, if you click a Web-based link, you must have Internet access to go to the site
associated with the link.
Supported operating systems
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is supported for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows 2003
server.
To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software
Use one of the following methods to open HP Easy Printer Care Software:
●On the Start menu, select Programs, select HP Easy Printer Care, and then select Start HP Easy
Printer Care.
●In the Windows system tray/taskbar (in the lower righthand corner of the desktop), double-click
the HP Easy Printer Care Software icon.
●Double-click the desktop icon.
HP Easy Printer Care Software sections
The HP Easy Printer Care Software contains the sections described in the table below.
Section Description
Overview tab
Contains basic status
information for the
printer.
●Device list: Shows the printers that you can select.
●Device Status section: Shows printer status information. This section will indicate printer alert
conditions, such as an empty print cartridge. It also shows device-identification information,
control-panel messages, and print-cartridge levels. After you correct a problem with the printer,
click the button to update the section.
●Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the percentage of toner
remaining in the print cartridges and the status of the media that is loaded in each tray.
●Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about
printer supplies, ordering information, and recycling information.
ENWW Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software 129
Section Description
Support tab
Provides help information
and links.
●Printer usage reports
●Software updates, including automatic updates for HP drivers
●Online diagnostics
●Online user documentation
●Online support
NOTE If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect to the Internet when you
first opened the HP Easy Printer Care Software, you must connect before you can
visit these Web sites.
Supplies Ordering
window
Provides access to online
or e-mail supplies
ordering.
●Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each printer. If you want to order a
certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list.
●Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP supplies Web site in a new browser window.
If you have checked the Order check box for any items, the information about those items can
be transferred to the Web site.
●Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have the Order check
box selected.
●Email Shopping List button: Creates a text list of items that have the Order check box
selected. The list can be copied into an e-mail message that you send to your supplier.
Alert Settings window
Allows you to configure
the printer to
automatically notify you
of printer issues.
●Alerts on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature for a certain printer.
●When alerts appear: Sets when you want alerts to appear—either when you are printing to
that particular printer, or anytime there is a printer event.
●Alert event type: Sets whether you want alerts for only critical errors, or for any error, including
continuable errors.
●Notification type: Sets what type of alert should appear (pop-up message or system tray alert,
and e-mail message).
Device List tab
Shows information about
each printer in the
Devices list.
●Printer information, including printer name, make, and model
●An icon (if the View as drop-down box is set to Tiles, which is the default setting)
●Any current alerts for the printer
If you click a printer in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care Software opens the Overview tab for that
printer.
Device List tab information includes the following:
Find Other Printers
window
Allows you to add more
printers to your printer
list.
Clicking the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list opens the Find Other Printers window.
The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you
can add them to the Devices list and then monitor those printers from your computer.
130 Chapter 5 Managing the printer ENWW
6 Color
This chapter describes how the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer provides great color printing.
This chapter also describes ways to produce the best possible color prints. The following topics are
covered:
●Using color
●Color matching
●Managing printer color options on Windows computers
●Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers
ENWW 131
Using color
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer offers great color printing as soon as you set up the
printer. It provides a combination of automatic color features to generate excellent color results for the
general office user, plus sophisticated tools for the professional who is experienced with color use.
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer provides carefully designed and tested color tables to
provide a smooth, accurate color rendition of all printable colors.
HP ImageREt 3600
HP ImageREt 3600 print technology is a system of innovative technologies developed exclusively by
HP to deliver superior print quality. The HP ImageREt system sets itself apart from the industry by
integrating technology advancements and optimizing each element of the print system. Several
categories of HP ImageREt have been developed for a variety of user needs.
The system’s foundation is composed of key color laser technologies, including image enhancements,
smart supplies, and high-resolution imaging. As the level or category of ImageREt increases, these core
technologies are refined for more advanced system usage, and additional technologies are integrated.
HP offers superior image enhancements for general office documents and marketing collateral.
Optimized for printing on HP color laser high-gloss papers, HP Image REt 3600 provides superior results
on all supported media, and under a variety of environmental conditions.
Paper selection
For the best color and image quality, it is important to select the appropriate media type from the printer
menu or from the front panel. See Selecting print media.
Color options
Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents.
Color options use object tagging, which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different
objects (text, graphics, and photos) on a page. The printer driver determines which objects are used on
a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object. Object
tagging, combined with optimized default settings, produces great color out of the box.
In the Windows environment, the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer
driver.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
sRGB
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a world-wide color standard originally developed by HP and
Microsoft as a common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners, digital cameras), and
output devices (printers, plotters). It is the default color space used for HP products, Microsoft operating
systems, the Web, and most office software sold today. sRGB is representative of the typical Windows
computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high-definition television.
NOTE Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room’s lighting can affect the
appearance of colors on your screen. For more information, see Color matching.
The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop, CorelDRAW™, Microsoft Office, and many other applications
use sRGB to communicate color. Most importantly, as the default color space in Microsoft operating
132 Chapter 6 Color ENWW
systems, sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between
applications and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly
improved color matching. sRGB improves your ability to match colors between the printer, the computer
monitor and other input devices (scanner, digital camera) automatically, without the need to become a
color expert.
Printing in four colors — CMYK
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK) are the inks used by a printing press. The process is often
called four-color printing. CMYK data files are typically used by and originate from graphic arts (printing
and publishing) environments. The printer will accept CMYK colors through the PS printer driver. The
printer color-rendering of CMYK is designed to provide rich, saturated colors for text and graphics.
CMYK ink set emulation (PostScript only)
The printer color rendering of CMYK can be made to emulate several standard offset press ink sets. In
some situations, the CMYK color values in an image or document might not be suited to the printer. For
example, a document might be optimized for another printer. For best results, the CMYK values should
be adapted to the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer. Select the appropriate color input profile
from the printer driver.
●Default CMYK+. HP CMYK+ technology produces optimal printing results for most printing jobs.
●SWOP (Specification for Web Offset Publications). Common ink standard in the United States
and other countries/regions.
●Euroscale (also known as Euro Standard). Common ink standard in Europe and other countries/
regions.
●DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical). Common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions.
●Custom profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output,
for example, to emulate another HP color LaserJet printer. Color profiles can be downloaded
from http://www.hp.com.
ENWW Using color 133
Color matching
The process of matching printer output color to your computer screen is quite complex because printers
and computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors display colors by light pixels
using an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers print colors using a CMYK (cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black) process.
Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor. These factors
include:
●Print media
●Printer colorants (inks or toners for example)
●Printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology for example)
●Overhead lighting
●Personal differences in perception of color
●Software applications
●Printer drivers
●Computer operating system
●Monitors
●Video cards and drivers
●Operating environment (humidity for example)
Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors.
For most users, the best method for matching colors on your screen to your printer is to print sRGB
colors.
Sample book color matching
The process for matching printer output to preprinted sample books and standard color references is
complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a sample book if the inks used to create
the sample book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These are usually referred to as process color
sample books.
Some sample books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created colorants. Many of
these spot colors are outside of the range of the printer. Most spot color sample books have companion
process sample books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color.
Most process sample books will state which process standards were used to print the sample book. In
most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color matching to the process sample
book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the printer menu. If you cannot identify the process
standard, use SWOP ink emulation.
Printing color samples
To use the color samples, select the color sample that is the closest match to the color that you want.
Use the sample’s color value in your application to describe the object you want to match. Colors can
134 Chapter 6 Color ENWW
vary depending on paper type and the software application used. For more details on how to use the
color samples, go to http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
Use the following procedure to print color samples at the printer using the control panel:
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES or PRINT RGB SAMPLES.
5. Press to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES or PRINT RGB SAMPLES.
ENWW Color matching 135
Managing printer color options on Windows computers
Setting color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most common
printing requirements. However, for some documents, setting the color options manually can enhance
the way the document appears. Examples of these documents include marketing brochures that contain
many images or documents that are printed on a media type that is not listed in the printer driver.
For Windows, you can print in grayscale or change the color options by using settings found on the
Color tab in the printer driver.
For more information about how to access the printer drivers, see Gaining access to the printer
drivers.
Print in grayscale
Select the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver to print a document in black and white.
RGB Color (Color Themes)
Five values are available for the RGB Color setting:
●Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB
color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization
(WWW).
●Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap
images, such as .GIF or .JPEG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching
for rendering sRGB, bitmap images. This setting has no effect on text or vector-based graphics.
Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.
●Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. For
example, some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRBG, and documents that are produced
with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space. When printing from a professional software
program that uses AdobeRGB, it is important that you turn off the color management in the software
program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.
●Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents
properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the program in which you are
working or in the operating system.
CAUTION Use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color
in the software program or in the operating system.
●Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or use
special effects, such as sepia tones. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile
to more accurately predict and control color output. You can download custom profiles from
http://www.hp.com.
Automatic or manual color adjustment
The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge
enhancements that are used for each element in a document. For more information, see your printer
driver online Help.
136 Chapter 6 Color ENWW
NOTE Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing most color documents.
The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color treatment, halftones,
and edge enhancements for text, graphics, and photographs. To access the Manual color options, from
the Color tab, select Manual, then Settings.
Manual color options
You can manually adjust color options for Edge Control, Halftones, and Neutral Grays.
Edge Control
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has three components:
adaptive halftoning, REt, and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases the edge sharpness. Trapping
reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The
color REt option smoothes the edges.
NOTE If you notice white gaps between objects, or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow
of cyan, magenta, or yellow at the edge, choose an edge-control setting that increases the
trapping level.
Four levels of edge control are available:
●Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are
on.
●Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning and color
REt settings are on.
●Light sets trapping at a minimal level. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on.
●Off turns off trapping, adaptive halftoning, and color REt.
Halftone options
Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings
for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail.
●The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when uniform and smooth
area fills are top priority.
●The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or
colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option when sharp
edges and details are top priority.
NOTE Some applications convert text or graphics to bitmap images. In these cases, setting the
color options for Photographs also affects how text and graphics appear.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors that are used in text,
graphics, and photographs.
ENWW Managing printer color options on Windows computers 137
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:
●Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) using only black toner. This guarantees
neutral colors without a color cast.
●4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method
produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest
black.
NOTE Some applications convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases, setting the
color options for Photographs also affects how text and graphics appear.
Restricting color printing
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers include a Restrict Color setting for networked printers.
A network administrator can use the setting to restrict user access to the color printing features in order
to conserve color toner. If you are unable to print in color, see your network administrator.
1. Press Menu.
2. Press to select PRINT QUALITY, and then press .
3. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP, and then press .
4. Press to select Restrict Color, and then press .
5. Press to select one of the following options:
●DISABLE COLOR: This setting denies the printer color capabilities to all users.
●ENABLE COLOR: This is the default setting, which allows all users to use the printer color
capabilities.
●COLOR IF ALLOWED: This setting allows the network administrator to allow color use for
select users. Use the embedded Web server to designate users who can print in color.
6. Press to save the setting.
The network administrator can monitor color usage for a specific HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series
printer by printing a color-usage job log. See Printer information pages for more information.
For more information about restricting and reporting color usage, go to http://www.hp.com/go/
coloraccess.
138 Chapter 6 Color ENWW
Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers
Setting the color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most
common printing requirements. However, for some documents, setting the color options manually can
enhance the way the document appears. Examples of these documents include marketing brochures
that contain many images or documents that are printed on a media type that is not listed in the printer
driver.
Print color as gray or change the color options by using the Color Options pop-up menu in the Print
dialog box.
For more information about how to gain access to the printer drivers, see Gaining access to the printer
drivers.
Print Color as Gray
Selecting the Print Color as Gray option from the printer driver prints a document in black and shades
of gray. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output, or for
printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.
Advanced color options for text, graphics, and photographs
Use manual color adjustment to adjust the Color (or Color Map) and Halftoning options for a print job.
Halftone options
Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings
independently for text, graphics, and photographs. The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail.
●The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option when uniform and smooth
area fills are the top priority.
●The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or
colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option when sharp
edges and details are the top priority.
NOTE Some software programs convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases,
the Photographs settings also control text and graphics.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method that the printer uses to create gray colors in text,
graphics, and photographs.
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:
●Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This guarantees
neutral colors that do not have a color cast.
●4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method
produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest
black.
ENWW Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers 139
NOTE Some software programs convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases,
the Photographs settings also control text and graphics.
RGB Color
Five values are available for the RGB Color setting:
●Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB
color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization
(WWW).
●Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap
images, such as .GIF or .JPEG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching
for rendering sRGB, bitmap images. This setting has no effect on text or vector-based graphics.
Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.
●Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. For
example, some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRGB, and documents that are produced
with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space. When printing from a professional software
program that uses AdobeRGB, it is important that you turn off the color management in the software
program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.
●Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents
properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the program that you are using or
in the operating system.
CAUTION Use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color
in the software program or in the operating system.
●Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or use
special effects, such as sepia tones. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile
to more accurately predict and control color output. You can download custom profiles from
http://www.hp.com.
Edge Control
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has three components:
adaptive halftoning, Resolution Enhancement Technology (REt), and trapping. Adaptive halftoning
increases the edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly
overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The color REt option smooths the edges.
NOTE If you notice white gaps between objects, or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow
of cyan, magenta, or yellow at the edge, choose an edge-control setting that increases the
trapping level.
Four levels of edge control are available:
●Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are
on.
●Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning and color
REt settings are on.
●Light sets trapping at a minimal level. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on.
●Off turns off trapping, adaptive halftoning, and color REt.
140 Chapter 6 Color ENWW
7 Maintenance
This chapter describes ways to maintain your printer. The following topics are covered:
●Managing print cartridges
●Changing print cartridges
●Replacing supplies
●Using the cleaning page
●Configuring alerts
ENWW 141
Managing print cartridges
Be sure to use genuine HP print cartridges with ColorSphere toner for the best printing results.
HP ColorSphere toners ensure high quality results, page after page. This section provides information
about using and storing HP cartridges correctly. It also provides information about using non-HP print
cartridges.
HP print cartridges
When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge, you can obtain the following supplies information:
●Percentage of supplies remaining
●Estimated number of pages remaining
●Number of pages printed
NOTE See Part numbers for cartridge ordering information.
Non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured. Because they are not genuine HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control
their quality. Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will not be covered
under the printer warranty.
When you use a non-HP print cartridge, certain features, such as remaining toner volume data may not
be available as a result of using this non-HP supply.
If the non-HP print cartridge was sold to you as a genuine HP product, see HP fraud hotline.
Print cartridge authentication
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer automatically authenticates the print cartridges when the
cartridges are inserted into the printer. During authentication, the printer informs you if a cartridge is a
genuine HP print cartridge.
If the printer control panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you believe
you purchased an HP print cartridge, call the HP fraud hotline.
To override a non-HP print cartridge error message, press the button.
HP fraud hotline
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) when you install an HP print
cartridge and the printer message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the product is
genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:
●You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.
●The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from HP
packaging).
142 Chapter 7 Maintenance ENWW
Print cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a
few minutes.
Print cartridge life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on usage patterns and the amount of toner that print jobs require.
HP black and color print cartridges both last an average of 7,500 pages. when printing on letter or A4-
size paper at 5% coverage. Usage conditions and print patterns can make actual results vary.
At any time, you can verify the life expectancy by checking the toner level, as described below.
Checking the print cartridge life
You can check print cartridge life using the printer control panel, the embedded Web server, printer
software, HP Easy Printer Care Software, or HP Web Jetadmin software.
Using the printer control panel
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.
5. Press to print the supplies status page.
Using the embedded Web server
1. In your browser, enter the IP address for the printer home page. This takes you to the printer status
page. See Using the embedded Web server.
2. On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status page,
which provides print cartridge information.
Using HP Easy Printer Care Software
On the Overview tab, in the Supplies Status section, click Supplies Details to open the supplies status
page.
For more information about HP Easy Printer Care software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/
easyprintercare.
Using HP Web Jetadmin
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the printer device. The device status page shows print cartridge information.
ENWW Managing print cartridges 143
Changing print cartridges
When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message
recommending that you order a replacement. The printer can continue to print using the current print
cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge.
The printer uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M),
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).
Replace a print cartridge when the printer control panel displays a REPLACE [COLOR] CARTRIDGE
message. The control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced (if a genuine HP
cartridge is currently installed).
Replacing a print cartridge
CAUTION If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold
water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE For information about recycling used print cartridges, see Return and recycling
instructions, or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/recycle.
To replace the print cartridge
1. Lift the top cover of the printer.
CAUTION The fuser might be hot.
144 Chapter 7 Maintenance ENWW
2. Pull down the front cover and transfer unit.
CAUTION Do not place any item on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is
punctured, print quality problems could result.
3. Remove the used print cartridge from the printer.
4. Remove the new print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling.
ENWW Changing print cartridges 145
5. Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is completely
seated.
NOTE The print cartridge tape seal is removed automatically when the print cartridge is
installed in the printer.
NOTE If a cartridge is in the wrong slot, the control panel will display the message
INCORRECT [COLOR] CARTRIDGE.
6. Close the front cover and then close the top cover. After a short while, the control panel should
display Ready.
7. Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived.
See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
8. If you are using a non-HP print cartridge, check the control panel for further instructions.
For additional help, go to http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
146 Chapter 7 Maintenance ENWW
Replacing supplies
When you use genuine HP supplies, the printer automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly
depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need
to be replaced.
Locating supplies
Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles.
The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item.
Figure 7-1 Supply item locations
1Fuser
2Print cartridges
3Transfer unit
Supply replacement guidelines
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the
printer.
●Allow sufficient space above and in the front of the printer for removing supplies.
●The printer should be located on a flat, sturdy surface.
For instructions about installing supplies, see the installation guides that came with each supply item or
find more information at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005. When you connect, click Solve a
Problem.
CAUTION Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of genuine HP products in this printer. Use
of non-HP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the Hewlett-
Packard extended warranty or service agreements.
ENWW Replacing supplies 147
Making room around the printer for replacing supplies
The following illustration shows the clearance necessary in front of, above, and to the side of the printer
for replacing supplies.
12
3
Figure 7-2 Supplies replacement clearance diagram
1530 mm (20.9 inches)
21294 mm (50 inches)
3804 mm (31.7 inches)
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies
The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control panel messages
that prompt when to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns can cause results to vary.
Item Printer message Page count Approximate time period
2
Black cartridges REPLACE BLACK
CARTRIDGE
7,500 pages
1
4 months
Color cartridges REPLACE [COLOR]
CARTRIDGE
7,500 pages
1
4 months
Image transfer kit REPLACE TRANSFER KIT 100,000 pages 50 months
Image fuser kit REPLACE FUSER KIT 125,000 pages
3
62 months
1Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on 5% coverage of individual colors.
2Approximate life is based on 2,000 pages per month.
3Approximate life is estimated at 125,000 pages when printing in 4-page intermittent mode.
You can use the embedded Web server to order supplies. For more information, see Using the
embedded Web server.
148 Chapter 7 Maintenance ENWW
Using the cleaning page
During printing, toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer. Over time, this buildup can
cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. This printer has a cleaning mode that
can correct and prevent these problems.
Cleaning the HP Color LaserJet CP4005n printer at the control panel
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight CREATE CLEANING PAGE.
7. Press to select CREATE CLEANING PAGE.
NOTE The printer prints a cleaning page with a pattern. The PROCESS CLEANING
PAGE option is not available for these printers until the cleaning page has been created.
8. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
9. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
10. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
11. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
12. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
ENWW Using the cleaning page 149
13. Press to highlight PROCESS CLEANING PAGE.
14. Press to select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE.
Cleaning the HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn printer at the control panel
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight PROCESS CLEANING PAGE.
7. Press to select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE.
A page with a pattern prints.
Setting auto cleaning
The AUTO CLEANING menu option allows you to turn auto cleaning on or off. When auto cleaning is
turned on, the printer prints a cleaning page when the page count reaches the value set in the cleaning
interval. If auto cleaning is set to Off, the cleaning interval is not shown. The default value for auto
cleaning is Off.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight AUTO CLEANING.
7. Press to select AUTO CLEANING.
8. Press to highlight the desired value.
9. Press to select the desired value.
Setting the cleaning interval
The CLEANING INTERVAL menu option allows you to set the interval at which the auto cleaning is due
for the printer. The cleaning interval can be set anywhere from 1,000 to 20,000 pages.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
150 Chapter 7 Maintenance ENWW
6. Press to highlight CLEANING INTERVAL.
7. Press to select CLEANING INTERVAL.
8. Press to highlight the desired value.
9. Press to select the desired value.
ENWW Using the cleaning page 151
Configuring alerts
You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the printer’s embedded Web server to configure the system to alert
you of problems with the printer. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-mail account or
accounts that you specify.
You can configure the following:
●The printer(s) you want to monitor
●What alerts are to be received (for example, alerts for paper jams, paper out, supplies status, and
cover open)
●The e-mail account to which the alerts should be forwarded
Software Information location
HP Web Jetadmin See HP Web Jetadmin for general information about HP Web
Jetadmin.
See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details on alerts
and how to set them up.
Embedded Web server See Using the embedded Web server for general information
about the embedded Web server.
See the embedded Web server Help system for details on
alerts and how to set them up.
152 Chapter 7 Maintenance ENWW
8 Problem solving
This chapter describes what to do if problems arise with your printer. The following topics are covered:
●Basic troubleshooting checklist
●Factors affecting printer performance
●Troubleshooting information pages
●Control panel message types
●Control panel messages
●Paper jams
●Common causes of paper jams
●Clearing jams
●Media-handling problems
●Printer response problems
●Printer control panel problems
●Incorrect printer output
●Software application problems
●Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems
●Color printing problems
●Print quality troubleshooting
ENWW 153
Basic troubleshooting checklist
If you are experiencing problems with the printer, this checklist can help identify the cause of the problem.
●Is the printer connected to power?
●Is the printer in the Ready state?
●Are all necessary cables connected?
●Are any messages displayed on the control panel?
●Was a genuine HP supply installed?
●Were recently replaced print cartridges installed correctly?
●Were recently installed supplies (image fuser kit, image transfer kit) installed correctly?
●Is the on/off switch in the on position?
If you cannot find solutions to printer problems in this guide, see http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
For additional information on installation and setup of the printer, see the getting started guide for this
printer.
154 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Factors affecting printer performance
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job. Among these is maximum printer speed, measured
in pages per minute (ppm). Other factors that affect printing speed include the use of special media
(such as transparencies, glossy media, heavy media, and custom-size media), printer processing time,
and download time.
The time required to download a print job from the computer and to process the job depends on the
following variables:
●The complexity and size of graphics
●The printer’s I/O configuration (network versus USB)
●The speed of the computer you are using
●The amount of printer memory installed
●The network operating system and configuration (if applicable)
●Printer personality (PCL or PostScript 3 emulation)
NOTE Adding additional printer memory might resolve memory problems, improve how the
printer handles complex graphics, and improve download times, but it will not increase maximum
printer speed (ppm rating).
ENWW Factors affecting printer performance 155
Troubleshooting information pages
From the printer control panel, you can print pages that can help diagnose printer problems. The
procedures for printing the following information pages are described here:
●Configuration page
NOTE It is recommended that you print a configuration page before beginning any printer
diagnostics.
●Paper path test page
●Registration page
●Event log
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view or restore current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer
problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as DIMMs, paper handling accessories,
trays, and printer languages.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
The message Printing... CONFIGURATION appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the
configuration page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing.
NOTE If the printer is configured with an HP Jetdirect print server or duplexer, an additional
configuration page will print that provides information about those devices.
Paper path test page
The paper path test page is useful for testing the paper handling features of the printer. You can define
the paper path you want to test by selecting the source, destination, and other options available on the
printer.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PAPER PATH TEST.
5. Press to select PAPER PATH TEST.
The message Performing... PAPER PATH TEST appears on the display until the printer finishes the
paper path test. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the paper path test page.
156 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Registration page
The registration page prints a horizontal arrow and a vertical arrow that show how far from center an
image can be printed on the page. You can set registration values for a tray so that an image on the
back and front of a page is centered. Setting the registration also allows edge-to-edge printing to be set
to within approximately 2 mm (0.08 inch) of all edges of the paper. Image placement varies slightly for
each tray. Perform the registration procedure for each tray.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight SET REGISTRATION.
7. Press to select SET REGISTRATION.
NOTE You can select a tray by specifying a Source. The default Source is Tray 2. To set
the registration for Tray 2, go to step 12. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
8. Press to highlight Source.
9. Press to select Source.
10. Press or to highlight a tray.
11. Press to select the tray.
After selecting the tray, the printer control panel returns to the SET REGISTRATION menu.
12. Press to highlight PRINT TEST PAGE.
13. Press to select PRINT TEST PAGE.
14. Follow the instructions on the printed page.
The message Printing... REGISTRATION PAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes
printing the registration page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the registration page.
Event log
The event log lists the printer events, including printer jams, service errors, and other printer conditions.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG.
5. Press to select PRINT EVENT LOG.
The message Printing... EVENT LOG appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the event
log. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log.
ENWW Troubleshooting information pages 157
Control panel message types
Control panel messages are divided into three types, depending on their severity.
●Status messages
●Warning messages
●Error messages
Within the error message category, some messages are ranked as Critical error messages. This section
explains the differences between the control panel message types.
Status messages
Status messages reflect the current state of the printer. They inform you of normal printer operation and
require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the printer changes. Whenever the
printer is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready is
displayed if the printer is online.
Warning messages
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the
Ready or Status messages and remain displayed until the button is pressed. If CLEARABLE
WARNINGS is set to JOB in the printer’s configuration menu, these messages are cleared by the next
print job.
Error messages
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing
a paper jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable; if AUTO CONTINUE = ON the printer will continue normal
operation after displaying an auto-continuable error message for 10 seconds.
NOTE Any button pressed during the 10-second display of an auto-continuable error message
will override the auto-continue feature and the function of the button pressed will take precedence.
For example, pressing the Menu button will display the main menu.
Critical error messages
Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by
turning the printer off and then on. These messages are not affected by the AUTO CONTINUE setting.
If a critical error persists, service is required.
The following table lists and describes control panel messages, in alphabetical order.
158 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel messages
Message listing
Control panel message Description Recommended action
10.90.X REPLACE
[COLOR] CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
A color cartridge is out of toner and needs to
be replaced.
Replace the color cartridge.
10.X.X CARTRIDGES
NOT ENGAGED
The print cartridge is not seated properly in
the printer.
Remove and reinstall the print cartridge.
10.X.X SUPPLY
MEMORY ERROR
alternates with
For help press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The printer cannot read or write to at least one
print cartridge memory tag or at least one
memory tag is missing.
The following control panel messages
correspond to the color of the print cartridge:
10.00.00 = black print cartridge
10.00.01 = cyan print cartridge
10.00.02 = magenta print cartridge
10.00.03 = yellow print cartridge
1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. Press for more information.
3. If the error persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
11.X INTERNAL CLOCK ERROR This message is displayed when there is a
problem with the real-time clock on the
formatter board.
XX=01 Dead clock battery
XX=02 Dead real-time clock
Press to continue. If this error occurs, the
printer will continue to track the time and date
using the processor clock until the printer is
turned off. Unless the error is corrected, you
will be prompted to reset the date and time
whenever the printer is turned off then on.
13.X.XX JAM IN
DUPLEX PATH
For help press
There is a jam in the duplex path. 1. Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
3. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
13.X.XX JAM IN
PAPER PATH
For help press
There is a jam in the paper path. 1. Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
ENWW Control panel messages 159
Control panel message Description Recommended action
3. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
13.X.XX JAM IN
TRAY 1
Clear jam then
press
Paper is jammed in Tray 1. 1. Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2. Press to see step by step information.
3. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
13.X.XX JAM IN
TRAY X
For help press
A page is jammed in Tray 2 or optional Tray 3. 1. Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
3. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
13.X.XX JAM IN TOP
COVER OR DUPLEX AREA
For help press
There is a jam in the top cover area. 1. Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
3. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
13.X.XX JAM INSIDE
DUPLEXER
For help press
Paper is jammed in the duplexer. Check the
device for jammed paper.
1. Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
3. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
13.X.XX MULTIPLE
JAMS IN DUPLEX PATH
For help press
There are multiple jams in the duplex path.
This includes the top cover area.
1. Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
160 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
3. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
13.X.XX MULTIPLE
JAMS IN PAPER PATH
For help press
There are multiple jams in the paper path.
This includes the top cover area.
1. Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
3. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4. If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
20 Insufficient Memory
For help press
alternates with
20 Insufficient Memory
The printer has received more data from the
computer than fits in available memory.
1. Press to continue printing.
NOTE A loss of data will
occur.
2. Reduce the complexity of the print job to
avoid this error in the future.
3. Adding memory to the printer may allow
printing of more complex pages.
22 EMBEDDED I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
alternates with
The embedded Jetdirect print server has
overflowed.
Press to continue. When this error occurs,
data might be lost. If necessary, resend the
job to the printer.
40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD
TRANSMISSION
alternates with
A connection with the embedded Jetdirect
print server has been broken.
Turn the printer off then on. Press for more
information.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
41.3 UNEXPECTED
SIZE IN TRAY X
For help press
alternates with
LOAD TRAY X
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray press
Media is loaded that is longer or shorter in the
feed direction than the size configured for the
tray.
1. If the incorrect size was selected, cancel
the job or press to access help.
OR
2. Press to select another tray.
3. Press and to step through the
instructions.
ENWW Control panel messages 161
Control panel message Description Recommended action
41.5 UNEXPECTED
TYPE IN TRAY X
For help press
alternates with
LOAD TRAY X
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray press
The printer senses a different media type in
the media path than configured in the tray.
1. If the incorrect type was selected,
cancel the job or press to access help.
OR
2. Press to select another tray.
3. Press and to step through the
instructions.
49.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A critical firmware error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
50.X FUSER ERROR
For help press
A fuser error has occurred. The following are
specific fuser errors:
50.1: A low fuser temperature error has
occurred in the main thermistor.
50.2: A fuser warm-up service error has
occurred.
50.3: A high fuser temperature error has
occurred in the main thermistor.
50.6: An open fuser error has occurred.
50.7: A fuser pressure release mechanism
failure has occurred.
The error might be due to an inadequate
power supply, inadequate line voltage, or a
problem with the fuser.
1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
3. If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
50.X FUSER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A fuser error has occurred. Turn the printer off then on.
51.2Y
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
51.2Y
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
Either a laser beam detects an error, or a
laser error has occurred.
The values of Y are:
Y Description
0 - Black
1 - Cyan
2 - Magenta
3 - Yellow
1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
162 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
turn off then on
52.X PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off then on. Press for more
information.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
53.XX.X CHECK RAM
DIMM SLOT X
A memory error has occurred. If prompted to do so, press to continue. The
printer should come to the Ready state, but
will not make full use of all memory installed.
Otherwise:
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Verify that all DDR SDRAM meets
specifications and is correctly seated.
3. Turn the printer on.
4. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
54.XX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
Printing cannot continue. There is a sensor
malfunction.
Values of X are:
01 - Humidity sensor
15 - Yellow
16 - Magenta
17 - Cyan
18 - Black
1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
55.X.X DC
CONTROLLER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
55.0X.YY PRINTER ERROR
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A printer command error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
56.XX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A printer error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
ENWW Control panel messages 163
Control panel message Description Recommended action
57.0X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A printer fan error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
58.0X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
58.0X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A memory tag error was detected. 1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
59.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
59.XY
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A printer motor error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
Note: This message might also appear
if the transfer unit is missing or
incorrectly installed. Ensure that the
transfer unit is correctly installed.
60.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A tray lifting error has occurred, where XX is
the number of the tray.
1. Press to see step by step information.
2. If the error reappears, turn the printer off
then on.
3. If the error does not clear, record the
message and contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
62 NO SYSTEM
To continue
turn off then on
No system was found. 1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
For help press
alternates with
68.X PERMANENT
A non-volatile storage device is full. Pressing
the button should clear the message.
Printing can continue, but there may be
unexpected behavior.
X Description
0 for onboard NVRAM
1 for removable disk (flash or hard)
1. Press to continue.
2. For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off then
on.
3. If a 68.0 error persists, contact
HP Support.
164 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
STORAGE FULL 4. For 68.1 errors, use the HP Web
Jetadmin software to delete files from
the disk drive.
5. For 68.1 errors that persist, contact
HP Support.
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE WRITE FAIL
A non-volatile storage device is full. Pressing
the button should clear the message.
Printing can continue, but there may be
unexpected behavior.
X Description
0 for onboard NVRAM
1 for removable disk (flash or hard)
1. Press to continue.
2. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
3. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTINGS CHANGED
For help press
alternates with
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTINGS CHANGED
One or more printer settings saved in the non-
volatile storage device is invalid and has been
reset to its factory default. Pressing the
button should clear the message. Printing
can continue, but there may be unexpected
behavior.
1. Press to continue.
2. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
3. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
69.X PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
69.X PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off then on. Press for more
information.
79.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
A critical hardware error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on.
2. If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
[FS] DEVICE
FAILURE
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
A device failure has occurred on the specified
drive. Printing can continue for jobs that do
not require the Flash DIMM.
1. To clear the message, press the key.
2. If the message persists, remove and re-
install the EIO disk drive.
3. Turn the printer back on.
4. If the message still persists, replace the
Flash DIMM.
ENWW Control panel messages 165
Control panel message Description Recommended action
[FS] DEVICE
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
1. To enable writing to the Flash Memory,
turn off write protection, using HP Web
Jetadmin.
2. To clear the message, press the key.
3. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
[FS] FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system
command that attempted to store something
on the file system but was unsuccessful
because the file system is full.
1. Use HP Web Jetadmin software to
delete files from the Flash Memory and
try again.
2. To clear the message, press the key.
3. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
[FS] NOT
INITIALIZED
The device has not been initialized. You can use Web JetAdmin to initialize the
device.
ABCDEFGHIJ
0110000000
alternates with
To exit press. Stop
This message is displayed when a paper path
sensor test or a paper path test is run. The
alphabetical value indicates which sensor is
being checked.
No action necessary.
Access Denied
MENUS LOCKED
An attempt has been made to modify a menu
item while the control panel security
mechanism is enabled by the printer
administrator. The message will disappear
shortly, and the printer will return to Ready
state.
Contact the printer administrator to change
settings.
BAD DUPLEXER
CONNECTION
alternates with
For help press
The duplexer is not connected properly and
must be reinserted before printing can
continue.
Turn the printer off.
Press to see step by step information.
BAD OPTIONAL TRAY
CONNECTION
The 500-sheet input tray is not making proper
connection with the printer.
1. Verify that the printer is on a level
surface.
2. Turn the printer off.
3. Reseat the printer on the 500-sheet
input tray.
4. Turn the printer on after reseating the
500-sheet input tray.
BLACK CARTRIDGE IN
WRONG POSITION
alternates with
For help press
The black cartridge is installed in the wrong
slot and the cover is closed.
1. Open the top and front covers.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
2. Open the image transfer unit.
166 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
3. Remove the incorrect print cartridge.
4. Install the correct print cartridge.
5. Close image transfer unit and then close
the top and front covers.
Calibrating... The printer is calibrating. No action necessary.
Canceling... X The printer is in the process of canceling a
job. The message will continue to be
displayed while the job is stopped, the paper
path flushed, and any remaining incoming
data on the active data channel is received
and discarded.
No action necessary.
CARD SLOT X
NOT FUNCTIONAL
The flash card in slot X is not working
correctly.
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the card from the slot indicated
and replace with a new card.
Checking paper path The engine is turning its rollers to check for
possible paper jams.
No action necessary.
Checking printer The engine is doing an internal test. No action necessary.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY
NOT AVAILABLE
alternates with
CHOSEN PERSONALITY
NOT AVAILABLE
For help press
PJL encountered a request for a personality
that did not exist in the printer. The job is
aborted and no pages will be printed.
1. Press for detailed information.
2. Press and to step through the
instructions.
3. Reprint using the correct driver for the
device.
CLEANING DISK X% COMPLETE A storage device is being cleaned. Do not
turn the printer off. When the process is
complete, the printer will automatically
restart.
No action necessary.
Cleaning... A cleaning page is being processed. No action necessary.
Clearing event log This message is displayed while the event log
is cleared. The printer will exit the MENUS
once the event log has been cleared.
No action necessary.
Clearing paper path The printer jammed or detected misplaced
paper when turned on. The printer is
attempting to eject jammed pages
automatically.
No action necessary.
CLOSE FRONT COVERS
For help press
The top cover needs to be closed. Close front covers.
NOTE This message might also
appear if the fuser is missing or
incorrectly installed. Ensure that the
fuser is correctly installed.
Close top cover. The top cover of the printer is open. Close the top cover.
ENWW Control panel messages 167
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Creating... CLEANING PAGE This message is displayed while a cleaning
page is being generated. When the page is
complete, the control panel display backs up
one screen to the PRINT QUALITY menu.
No action necessary.
When the page is printed, follow the
instructions printed on the cleaning page to
process the page.
CYAN CARTRIDGE IN
WRONG POSITION
alternates with
For help press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The cyan cartridge is installed in the wrong
slot and the cover is closed.
1. Open the top and front covers.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
2. Open the image transfer unit.
3. Remove the incorrect print cartridge.
4. Install the correct print cartridge.
5. Close image transfer unit and then close
the top and front covers.
DATA RECEIVED
To print last page press Go
alternates with
Ready
To print last page press Go
The printer received data and is waiting for a
form feed. When the printer receives another
file, the message should disappear.
Press to continue printing.
Date/Time Prompt for setting the printer date and time.
Default format is [YYYY]/[MMM]/[DD] [HH]-
[MM].
To change, press and follow the time and
date prompts.
DELETING PRIVATE JOBS The printer is deleting a private stored job. A
PIN is required to delete a private job.
No action necessary.
Deleting... X The printer is currently deleting the stored job. No action necessary.
DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
A device failure has occurred on the specified
drive. Printing may continue for jobs that do
not require access to the disk drive.
1. To clear the message, press the key.
2. If the message persists, remove and re-
install the EIO disk drive.
3. Turn the printer back on.
4. If the message still persists, replace the
EIO disk drive.
DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system
command that attempted to perform an
illogical operation (for example, to download
a file to a non-existent directory). Printing may
continue.
1. To clear the message, press the key.
2. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
3. If the message reappears, there may be
a problem with the software application.
168 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system
command that attempted to store something
on the file system but was unsuccessful
because the file system is full.
1. Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to
delete the stored job from the printer
control panel.
2. To clear the message, press the key.
3. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system
command that attempted to store something
on the file system but was unsuccessful
because the file system is full.
●To clear the message, press the key.
●If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
NOTE This will also delete any files
saved in RAM.
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
1. To enable writing to the disk, turn off
write protection, using HP Web
Jetadmin.
2. To clear the message, press the key.
3. If the message persists, turn the printer
off and then on.
Event Log Empty SHOW EVENT LOG was selected from the
control panel, and the event log is empty.
No action necessary.
FLASH FILE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system
command that attempted to perform an
illogical operation (for example, to download
a file to a non-existent directory).
1. To clear the message, press the key.
2. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
3. If the message reappears, there may be
a problem with the software application.
Genuine HP supplies installed A new HP cartridge has been installed. The
printer returns to the Ready state after
approximately 10 seconds.
No action necessary.
INCOMPATIBLE [COLOR]
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
A cartridge is installed that is not intended for
use with this device.
1. Open the top and front covers.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
2. Open the image transfer unit.
3. Remove the incorrect print cartridge.
4. Install the correct print cartridge.
5. Close image transfer unit and then close
the top and front covers.
ENWW Control panel messages 169
Control panel message Description Recommended action
INCOMPATIBLE SUPPLIES
alternates with
For status press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
At least two supplies are installed that are not
intended for use in this device.
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES
STATUS menu.
2. Press and to highlight the specific
supply that has a problem.
3. Press to view help for the supply.
4. Press and to step through the
instructions.
Incorrect PIN The wrong PIN was entered. After three
incorrect PIN entries, the printer will return
to Ready.
Re-enter PIN correctly.
Initializing
permanent storage
Displayed when the printer is turned on to
show that permanent storage is being
initialized.
No action necessary.
Initializing... This message is displayed when the printer
is turned on, as soon as the individual tasks
begin initialization.
No action necessary.
INSERT OR CLOSE
TRAY X
For help press
Tray XX must be inserted or closed before the
current job can be printed.
Close the tray indicated.
INSTALL FUSER The fuser is not installed or is not installed
correctly.
Confirm that the fuser is installed in the printer
and is fully seated.
Press to see step by step information.
INSTALL SUPPLIES
For status press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
At least one supply item is missing or is not
correctly seated in the printer and another
supply item is missing, incorrectly placed,
out, or low. Insert the supply item or make
sure the installed supply item is fully seated.
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES
STATUS menu.
2. Press and to highlight the specific
supply that has a problem.
3. Press to view help for the supply.
4. Press and to step through the
instructions.
INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT The transfer unit is not installed or is not
installed correctly.
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES
STATUS menu.
2. Press to highlight the transfer unit.
3. Press to view help.
4. Press and to step through the
instructions.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
TO LOAD FONTS/DATA
For help press
alternates with
Device
The device does not have enough memory to
load the data, such as fonts or macros from
the location specified. Device can be one of
the following:
INTERNAL = ROM directly on the formatter
board
CARD SLOT X = font card in slot X
1. To use the device without the data,
press .
2. To solve the problem, add more
memory to the device. DDR SDRAM
Memory: 128MB, (Q2630A) or 256MB
(Q2631A).
170 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
DIMMS
LOAD TRAY 1:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
LOAD TRAY 1:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
Tray 1 is loaded and configured for a type and
size other than the one specified in the job.
1. If the correct paper is loaded, press .
2. Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper
and load Tray 1 with the specified paper.
3. If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
4. Confirm that the media guides are in the
correct position.
5. To use another tray, remove paper from
Tray 1 and then press .
LOAD TRAY 1:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
This message appears when Tray 1 is
selected but is not loaded, and no other paper
trays are available for use.
Load the correct paper in Tray 1 and press
to continue.
If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
LOAD TRAY 1:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray press
Alternates with
LOAD TRAY 1:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
This message appears when Tray 1 is
selected but is not loaded, and other paper
trays are available for use.
1. Load the correct paper in the tray.
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
3. Otherwise, select another tray.
LOAD TRAY X
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
This message appears when Tray XX is
selected but is not loaded, and no other paper
trays are available for use.
Load the correct paper in the tray and
press to continue.
LOAD TRAY X
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray press
alternates with
LOAD TRAY X
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a
type and size other than specified in the job,
and another paper tray is available.
1. Load the paper tray with the specified
media.
2. Confirm that the media guides are in the
correct position.
3. If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
4. To use another tray, press .
Loading
program X
DO NOT POWER OFF
Programs and fonts can be stored on the
printer’s file system and are loaded into RAM
when the printer is turned on. The number XX
specifies a sequence number indicating the
current program being loaded.
No action necessary. Do not turn the printer
off.
ENWW Control panel messages 171
Control panel message Description Recommended action
MAGENTA CARTRIDGE IN
WRONG POSITION
alternates with
For help press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The magenta cartridge is installed in the
wrong slot and the cover is closed.
1. Open the top and front covers.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
2. Open the image transfer unit.
3. Remove the incorrect print cartridge.
4. Install the correct print cartridge.
5. Close image transfer unit and then close
the top and front covers.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
To use another tray press
The job specifies manual feed, but Tray 1 is
empty. Another tray is available.
Add paper to Tray 1 or press to select
another tray.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
A job was sent specifying MANUAL FEED
and Tray 1 is empty.
No other tray is available.
1. Load Tray 1 with the correct paper and
press to continue.
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type
paper loaded.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
The job specifies MANUAL FEED, but Tray
1 is already loaded and configured for a type
or size other than that specified in the job.
1. Load the correct paper in Tray 1.
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
3. Otherwise, press to select another
tray.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray press
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
A job was sent that specified MANUAL
FEED and Tray 1 is empty. Another tray is
available.
1. Load Tray 1 with the correct paper.
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
3. Otherwise, press to select another
tray.
MANUALLY FEED
OUTPUT STACK
alternates with
The even-numbered pages of a manual two-
sided document have been printed and the
printer is waiting for the output stack to be
inserted for the odd-numbered pages to be
printed.
Follow the instructions on the Print on Both
Sides instruction dialog box at the computer.
OR
Press for help at the printer.
172 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Then press to
print second sides
Moving solenoid
To exit press. Stop
The printer is executing a component test and
the component selected is a solenoid.
No action necessary.
Moving solenoid and motor
To exit press. Stop
The printer is executing a component test and
the components selected are the solenoid
and the motor.
No action necessary.
No job to cancel There are no stored jobs that can be
canceled.
No action necessary.
NON HP SUPPLY
IN USE
alternates with
Ready
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges, but the
level of any refilled cartridge will not be
shown.
The printer has detected that a non-HP print
cartridge is currently installed.
If you believe you purchased an HP cartridge,
please call the HP fraud hotline (1–877–219–
3183, toll-free in North America).
CAUTION Any printer repair
required as a result of using non-HP
cartridges is not covered under HP
warranty.
ORDER [COLOR]
CARTRIDGE
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
alternates with
Ready
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The identified print cartridge is nearing the
end of its useful life. The printer is ready and
will continue for the estimated number of
pages indicated. Estimated pages remaining
is based upon the historical page coverage of
this printer.
Printing will continue until a supply needs to
be replaced.
1. Press to view help for the message.
2. Obtain the part number for the print
cartridge indicated.
3. Order a print cartridge
NOTE Supplies ordering
information is also available from the
embedded Web server. See Using
the embedded Web server for more
information.
ORDER FUSER KIT
LESS THAN X PAGES
For help press
alternates with
Ready
The fuser is near the end of its life. The printer
is ready and will continue for the estimated
number of pages indicated.
Printing will continue until a supply needs to
be replaced.
1. Press to view help for the message.
2. Obtain the part number for the fuser kit.
3. Order the fuser kit.
NOTE Supplies ordering
information is also available from the
embedded Web server. See Using
the embedded Web server for more
information.
ORDER SUPPLIES
alternates with
Ready
For help press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
More than one supply item is low.
Printing will continue until a supply needs to
be replaced.
1. Press Menu to access the menus.
2. Press or to highlight
INFORMATION, and then press .
3. Press or to highlight SUPPLIES
STATUS, and then press .
4. Press or to highlight a supply that
needs to be ordered.
ENWW Control panel messages 173
Control panel message Description Recommended action
5. Press to access help for the supply.
6. Obtain a part number from help.
7. Order the supply.
8. Repeat the previous steps as necessary
for each supply that needs to be
ordered.
9. Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the embedded Web
server for more information.
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
LESS THAN X PAGES
For help press
alternates with
Ready
The transfer unit is near end of life. Printing
can continue.
1. Press to view help for the message.
2. Obtain the transfer kit part number from
help.
3. Order the transfer kit.
NOTE Supplies ordering
information is also available from the
embedded Web server. See Using
the embedded Web server for more
information.
Paused
To return to Ready
press STOP
The printer is paused, and there are no error
messages pending at the display. The I/O
continues receiving data until memory is full.
Press the Stop key.
Performing
upgrade
A firmware upgrade is in process. Do not turn the printer off until the printer
returns to Ready.
Performing...
PAPER PATH TEST
The printer is performing a paper path test. No action necessary.
Please wait The printer is in the process of clearing data. No action necessary.
PRINT/STOP TEST The printer is performing a print/stop test. No action necessary.
PRINTING STOPPED This message is displayed when a Print/Stop
Test is run and time expires.
Press to continue printing.
Printing...
CMYK SAMPLES
This message displays while the printer
CMYK samples page is being generated.
No action necessary.
Printing...
CONFIGURATION
The printer is generating the configuration
page. The printer will return to the online
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Printing...
DEMO PAGE
The printer is generating the demo page. The
printer will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
174 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Printing...
DIAGNOSTICS PAGE
The printer is generating the diagnostics
page. The printer will return to the online
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Printing...
ENGINE TEST
The printer is generating the engine test
page. The printer will return to the online
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Printing...
EVENT LOG
The printer is generating the event log page.
The printer will return to the online Ready
state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Printing...
FILE DIRECTORY
The printer is generating the mass storage
directory page. The printer will return to the
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Printing...
FONT LIST
The printer is generating either the PCL or PS
personality typeface list. The printer will
return to the Ready state when the page is
completed.
No action necessary.
Printing...
MENU MAP
The printer is generating the printer menu
map. The printer will return to the Ready state
when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Printing...
PQ troubleshooting
The printer is generating the print quality
troubleshooting pages. The printer will return
to the Ready state when the pages are
printed.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Printing...
REGISTRATION PAGE
The printer is generating the registration
page. The printer will return to the SET
REGISTRATION menu when the page is
completed.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Printing...
RGB SAMPLES
This message displays while the printer RGB
samples page is being generated.
No action necessary.
Printing...
SUPPLIES STATUS
The printer is generating the supplies status
page. The printer will return to the online
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Printing...
USAGE PAGE
The printer is generating the usage page. The
printer will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Processing duplex
job
Do not grab paper
until job completes
Paper temporarily comes into the output bin
while printing a duplex job. Do not attempt to
remove the pages until the job is complete.
Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes
into the output bin. The message will
disappear when the job is finished.
Processing job
from tray X
The printer is actively processing a job from
the designated tray.
No action necessary.
Processing... The printer is currently processing a job but
is not yet picking pages. When paper motion
begins, this message will be replaced by a
message that indicates which tray the job is
being printed from.
No action necessary.
ENWW Control panel messages 175
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Processing...
copy <X> of <Y>
The printer is currently processing or printing
collated copies. The message indicates that
copy X of Y total copies is currently being
processed.
No action necessary.
Processing...
INTERMITTENT MODE
For help press
This message might be displayed during
periods of heavy usage if the printer becomes
overheated. If this occurs, the printer enters
a mode in which it prints for one minute and
pauses for one minute. This cycle continues
until the operating temperature stabilizes.
Press to see step by step information.
RAM DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
A device failure has occurred on the specified
drive.
1. To clear the message, press the key.
2. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
3. If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005.
RAM DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system
command that attempted to perform an
illogical operation (for example, to download
a file to a non-existent directory).
Printing may continue.
1. To clear the message, press the key.
2. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
3. If the message reappears, there may be
a problem with the software application.
RAM DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
1. To enable writing to the RAM disk, turn
off write protection, using HP Web
Jetadmin software.
2. To clear the message, press the key.
3. If the message persists, turn the printer
off then on.
Ready
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The printer is online and ready for data. No
status or device attendance messages are
pending at the display.
No action necessary.
Ready
Diagnostics mode
To exit press. Stop
The printer is in a special diagnostics mode. Press the Stop key to exit the special
diagnostics mode.
OR
No action is necessary.
Ready
IP Address:
The printer is online and ready. No action necessary.
Receiving
upgrade
A firmware upgrade is in progress. Do not turn the printer off until the printer
returns to Ready.
REINSERT DUPLEXER The duplexer has been removed. Press to see step by step information.
REMOVE ALL The printer is executing a component test and
the component selected is Belt Only.
Remove all print cartridges.
176 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
PRINT CARTRIDGES
To exit press. Stop
Remove at least one
print cartridge.
To exit press. Stop
The printer is executing a disable cartridge
check or component test where the
component selected is the cartridge motor.
Remove one print cartridge.
REPLACE [COLOR]
CARTRIDGE
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
alternates with
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The identified print cartridge has reached the
end of life and the COLOR SUPPLY OUT
setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set
to STOP AT OUT. Printing can continue.
1. Order the appropriate print cartridge.
2. To continue, press .
3. Open the front and top covers and then
open the image transfer unit.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
4. Remove the identified print cartridge.
5. Install a new print cartridge.
6. Close the image transfer unit and the top
and front covers.
7. Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the embedded Web
server for more information.
REPLACE FUSER KIT
For help press
The fuser kit has reached the end of its life.
Replace the fuser kit. Printing can continue
although print quality might be reduced.
1. Open the top cover.
2. Grasp the purple handles on the fuser
unit.
3. Remove the old fuser unit from the
printer.
4. Install a new fuser unit and secure with
thumb screws.
5. Close the top cover.
6. Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the embedded Web
server for more information.
REPLACE FUSER KIT
For help press
alternates with
REPLACE FUSER KIT
The fuser is nearing the end of its useful life
and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in
the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP
AT OUT. Printing can continue.
1. Order the fuser kit.
2. To continue printing, press .
3. To replace the fuser kit, perform the
following steps:
●Open the top cover.
●Grasp the purple handles on the
fuser unit.
ENWW Control panel messages 177
Control panel message Description Recommended action
●Remove the old fuser unit from the
printer.
●Install the new fuser unit.
●Close the top cover.
●Supplies ordering information is
also available from the embedded
Web server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
Multiple supplies are at the end of their useful
life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in
the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP
AT OUT.
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES
STATUS menu.
2. Press and to highlight the specific
supply that has a problem.
3. Press to view help for the supply.
4. Press and to step through the
instructions.
5. Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the embedded Web
server for more information.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
For status press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
Multiple supplies are at the end of their useful
life. If the supplies affected are cartridges
only, printing has stopped because the
REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in the
SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT
LOW. If the affected supplies are cartridges
only, printing will not continue.
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES
STATUS menu.
2. Press and to highlight the specific
supply that has a problem.
3. Press to view help for the supply.
4. Press and to step through the
instructions.
5. Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the embedded Web
server for more information.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Override in use
alternates with
<Current status message>
The printer is set to continue printing even
though a print cartridge has reached end of
life.
CAUTION Using the Override
mode can result in unsatisfactory
print quality. HP recommends
replacing the supply when the
REPLACE SUPPLIES Override in
use message appears. The
HP Supplies Premium Protection
Warranty coverage ends when a
supply is used in Override mode.
Press to see step by step information.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Using black only
alternates with
This message is generated when a print
cartridge (or print cartridges) has reached the
out condition and the printer is set to
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK.
Press to see step by step information.
178 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
<Current status message>
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
For help press
The transfer unit is at end of life. Printing can
continue but print quality might be reduced.
1. Open the top and front cover.
2. Lower the transfer unit by pulling the
green handle at the top of the unit
downward.
3. Depress the small blue latches located
on either side of the bottom of the
transfer unit and lift the unit out of the
printer.
4. Install the new transfer unit.
5. Close the front and top covers.
6. Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the embedded Web
server for more information.
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
For help press
alternates with
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
The transfer unit is nearing the end of its
useful life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES
setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set
to STOP AT OUT.
1. Order the transfer kit.
2. To continue printing, press .
3. To replace the transfer kit, perform the
following steps:
●Open the top and front cover.
●Lower the transfer unit by pulling
the green handle at the top of the
unit downward.
●Depress the small blue latches
located on either side of the bottom
of the transfer unit and lift the unit
out of the printer.
●Install the new transfer unit.
●Close the front and top covers.
●Supplies ordering information is
also available from the embedded
Web server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
Request accepted
please wait
The printer has accepted a request to print an
internal page, but the current job must finish
printing before the internal page will print.
No action necessary.
Resend
upgrade
The firmware upgrade was not completed
successfully.
Attempt upgrade again.
Restoring...
[accessory #]
The printer is restoring external accessory
settings in response to a user request.
No action necessary.
Restoring... The printer is restoring settings. This
message is displayed during the execution of
No action necessary.
ENWW Control panel messages 179
Control panel message Description Recommended action
a restore action, such as RESTORE COLOR
VALUES.
Restoring...
factory settings
The printer is restoring factory settings. No action necessary.
RESTRICTED FROM PRINTING IN COLOR
alternates with
Ready
The printer is set to COLOR IF ALLOWED
and you or your software program are not
authorized to print in color.
Get your network administrator to set the user
or program permissions that will allow you to
print in color.
Rotating [COLOR]
motor
To exit press. Stop
A component test is in progress; the
component selected is the <color> cartridge
motor.
Press Stop when ready to stop this test.
Rotating motor
To exit press. Stop
The printer is executing a component test and
the component selected is a motor.
Press Stop when ready to stop this test.
Setting saved A menu selection has been saved. No action necessary.
SIZE MISMATCH
TRAY X=[SIZE]
For help press
alternates with
Ready
The tray is loaded with media longer or
shorter in the feed direction than the size
configured for the tray.
1. Adjust the side and rear media guides
against the paper.
2. If necessary, press after the tray is
closed to change the paper size or type
configuration to match the size or type
in the tray.
Sleep mode on The printer is in sleep mode. A button press,
receipt of printable data, or an error condition
will clear this message.
No action necessary.
SUPPLIES IN
WRONG POSITION
alternates with
For status press
At least one supply item is incorrectly
positioned in the printer and another supply
item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low.
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES
STATUS menu.
2. Press and to highlight the specific
supply that has a problem.
3. Press to view help for the supply.
4. Press and to step through the
instructions.
Transfer unit can
be easily damaged.
alternates with
For help press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The cartridge is either not installed or not
correctly installed in the printer.
1. Open the top and front covers.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
2. Open the image transfer unit.
3. Insert the print cartridge and make sure
that it is fully seated.
180 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message Description Recommended action
4. Close the image transfer unit and then
close the top and front covers.
5. If the error persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
TRAY X EMPTY
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
Ready
The specified tray is empty and the current
job does not need this tray to print.
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
TRAY X OPEN
For help press
alternates with
Ready
The specified tray is open or not closed
completely.
Close the tray.
TRAY X SIZE= [SIZE]
Setting saved
The size selected from the menu has been
saved.
No action is necessary.
TYPE MISMATCH
TRAY X=[TYPE]
For help press
alternates with
Ready
The media type loaded in the tray does not
match the media type configured for the tray.
1. Adjust the side and rear guides against
the paper.
2. If necessary, press after the tray is
closed to change the paper size or type
to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Unable to mopy job
alternates with
Processing...
The print job cannot be mopied because of a
memory or configuration problem. Only one
copy will be produced.
Install additional memory in the printer.
Unable to Store Job
JOB NAME
alternates with
Processing...
A job cannot be stored because of a memory
or configuration problem.
Install additional memory in the printer.
USB ACCESSORY
ERROR
For help press
This message appears when a connected
USB accessory draws too much power.
When this happens, the ACC port is disabled
and printing stops.
Press to see step by step information.
USE TRAY X
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To change press /
To use press
The printer is offering a selection of alternate
media to use for the print job.
1. View tray configurations (type and size)
using and .
2. Press to select a tray to use.
3. To return to the previous message,
press Back.
Wait for printer RAM disk settings have been changed before
the printer automatically restarts, or external
No action necessary.
ENWW Control panel messages 181
Control panel message Description Recommended action
to reinitialize device modes have changed or the printer is
coming out of the diagnostics mode and will
automatically restart.
Waiting for
tray X to lift
The printer is waiting for Tray 2 or optional
Tray 3 to lift.
No action necessary.
Warming up The printer is coming out of sleep mode.
Printing will continue as soon as warmup is
completed.
No action necessary.
X.X EMBEDDED
JET DIRECT ERROR
This message is generated by a failure of the
embedded Jetdirect print server.
Turn the printer off then on. Press for more
information.
If the message persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
YELLOW CARTRIDGE IN
WRONG POSITION
alternates with
For help press
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The yellow cartridge is installed in the wrong
slot and the cover is closed.
1. Open the top and front covers.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
2. Open the image transfer unit.
3. Remove the incorrect print cartridge.
4. Install the correct print cartridge.
5. Close image transfer unit and then close
the top and front covers.
182 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Paper jams
Use this illustration to troubleshoot paper jams in the printer. For instructions on clearing paper jams,
see Clearing jams.
NOTE All areas of the printer that might need to be opened to clear jams are equipped with
green handles for rapid identification.
1Top cover area
2Duplex path
3Paper path
4Input path
5Optional Tray 3
Paper jam recovery
This printer automatically provides paper jam recovery, a feature that allows you to set whether the
printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages. The options are:
●AUTO — Printer will automatically attempt to reprint jammed pages. This is the default.
●OFF — Printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages.
●On — Printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages.
NOTE During the recovery process, the printer might reprint several good pages that were
printed before the paper jam occurred. Be sure to remove any duplicated pages.
ENWW Paper jams 183
To disable paper jam recovery
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY.
7. Press to select JAM RECOVERY.
8. Press to highlight OFF.
9. Press to select OFF.
10. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state.
To improve print speed and increase memory resources, you might want to disable paper jam recovery.
If paper jam recovery is disabled, the pages involved in a jam will not be reprinted.
184 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Common causes of paper jams
The following table lists common causes of paper jams and suggested solutions for resolving them.
Paper jams
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
When the printer is first installed, the protective insert does not
eject properly.
See Jam in Tray 1.
Print media does not meet HP-recommended media
specifications.
Use only media that meets HP specifications. See Supported
media weights and sizes.
A supply item is installed incorrectly, causing repeated jams. Verify that all print cartridges, the transfer unit, and the fuser
are correctly installed.
You are reloading paper that has already passed through a
printer or copier.
Do not use media that has been previously printed on or
copied.
An input tray is loaded incorrectly. Remove media from the input tray and replace the media within
the tray. Adjust the media width guide to hold the media firmly
in place without bending it. See Configuring input trays.
Print media is skewed. Input tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust input tray
guides so they hold media firmly in place without bending it. If
media heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb) is loaded into Tray 2 and
optional Tray 3, the media might skew.
Print media is binding or sticking together. Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, or flip it over.
Reload media into the input tray. Do not fan media.
Print media is removed before it settles into the output bin. Reset the printer. Wait until the page completely settles in the
output bin before removing it.
When duplexing, the print media is removed before the second
side of the document is printed.
Reset the printer and print the document again. Wait until the
page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
Print media is in poor condition. Replace the print media.
Print media is not picked up by the internal rollers from Tray 2
or optional Tray 3.
Remove the top sheet of media. If the media is heavier than
105 g/m2 (28 lb), it might not be picked from the tray.
Print media has rough or jagged edges. Replace the media.
Print media is perforated or embossed. This media does not separate easily. You might need to feed
single sheets from Tray 1.
Printer supply items have reached the end of their useful life. Check the printer control panel for messages prompting you to
replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the
remaining life of the supplies. See Replacing supplies for more
information.
Media was not stored correctly. Replace the print media. Media should be stored in the original
packaging in a controlled environment.
NOTE If the printer continues to jam, contact
HP Customer Support or your authorized HP service
provider. For more information, see
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
ENWW Common causes of paper jams 185
Clearing jams
Each section below corresponds with a jam message that might appear on the control panel. Use these
procedures to clear the jam.
Jam in Tray 1
1. Open Tray 1.
2. Remove loaded paper from Tray 1.
3. Reload paper in Tray 1 and check to make sure the media is loaded correctly.
NOTE Do not load media above the fill tabs.
4. Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
5. To continue printing, press , and then press .
186 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Jam in Tray 2 or optional Tray 3
1. Pull out the tray indicated and place it on a flat surface. Make sure that the paper guides are in the
correct position.
2. Remove any partially fed media. Grasp the media by both corners and pull down.
NOTE Use Tray 1 to avoid jams with heavier paper.
3. Inspect the media path to ensure that it is clear.
NOTE If the media tears, make sure that all media fragments are removed from the paper
path before resuming printing.
4. For jams that occur in optional Tray 3, check the trays above for jams as well. For example, if the
jam occurs in optional Tray 3, also open Tray 2 and Tray 1 and remove any jammed media.
ENWW Clearing jams 187
5. Check to make sure the media is loaded correctly. Insert the tray into the printer. Make sure all
trays are completely closed.
Jams in top cover area
Jams in the top cover occur in of the areas indicated in the figures below. Use the procedures in this
section to clear a jam in this area.
1Jammed paper
2Crumpled paper in the fuser
188 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Clearing a jam in the top cover area
WARNING! Do not touch the fuser. It is hot and could cause burns! The fuser’s operating
temperature is 190°C (374°F). Wait ten minutes to allow the fuser to cool before touching the
fuser.
1. Open the top and front covers.
2. Grasp any visible media by both corners and pull to remove it.
3. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down.
ENWW Clearing jams 189
4. Grasp the media by both corners and pull down.
5. Close the transfer unit.
6. Close the top and front covers.
190 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Clearing other jams
1. Using the handles, open the top and front covers.
2. If media is present, grasp the media by both corners and pull down.
3. If media is present, grasp the media by both corners and pull up.
NOTE If no media is present at these locations, continue to the next step.
ENWW Clearing jams 191
4. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down.
5. If media is present, grasp the media by both corners and pull down.
6. If media is present, grasp the media by both corners and pull up.
192 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
7. Close the transfer unit.
8. Close the top and front covers.
ENWW Clearing jams 193
Media-handling problems
Use only media that meets HP specifications. For paper specifications for this printer, see Supported
media weights and sizes.
For media ordering information, see Supplies and accessories.
Multiple sheets
Table 8-1 Printer feeds multiple sheets
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The input tray is overfilled. Remove excess media from the input tray.
Print media is sticking together. Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over, and
then reload it into the tray.
NOTE Do not fan media. Fanning can cause static
electricity, which can cause media to stick together.
Media does not meet the specifications for this printer. Use only media that meets HP media specifications for this
printer. See Supported media weights and sizes.
Trays are not properly adjusted. Make sure that the rear media-length guide indicates the
length of media being used.
Incorrect page size
Table 8-2 Printer feeds incorrect page size
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The correct size media is not loaded in the input tray. Load the correct size media in the input tray.
The correct size media is not selected in the software
application or printer driver.
Confirm that the settings in the application and printer driver
are appropriate, because the application settings override the
printer driver and control panel settings, and the printer driver
settings override the control panel settings. For more
information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh
computers.
The correct size media for Tray 1 is not selected in the printer
control panel.
From the control panel, select the correct size media for Tray
1.
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the media size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the
paper.
194 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Incorrect tray
Table 8-3 Printer pulls from incorrect tray
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
You are using a driver for a different printer. For more
information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh
computers.
Use a driver for this printer.
The specified tray is empty. Load media in the specified tray.
Tray behavior for the requested tray is set to FIRST in the
SYSTEM SETUP submenu of the CONFIGURE DEVICE
menu.
Change the setting to EXCLUSIVELY.
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the media size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Automatic feed error
Table 8-4 Media does not feed automatically
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Manual feed is selected in the software application. Load Tray 1 with media, or, if the media is loaded, press .
The correct size media is not loaded. Load the correct size media.
The input tray is empty. Load media into the input tray.
Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any media in the paper path.
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams. See Paper jams.
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the media size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the
paper.
Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 feed error
Table 8-5 Media does not feed from Tray 2 or optional Tray 3
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Manual feed is selected in the software application. Load Tray 1 with media, or, if the media is loaded, press .
The correct size media is not loaded. Load the correct size media.
The input tray is empty. Load media in the input tray.
ENWW Media-handling problems 195
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The correct media type for the input tray is not selected in the
printer control panel.
From the printer control panel, select the correct media type
for the input tray.
Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any media in the paper path.
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams. See Paper jams.
None of the optional trays appear as input tray options. The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that
the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional
trays. For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer
drivers for Macintosh computers.
An optional tray is incorrectly installed. Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the
printer.
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the media size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Special media feed error
Table 8-6 Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The correct media type is not specified in the software or printer
driver.
Verify that the correct media type is selected in the software or
printer driver.
The input tray is overfilled. Remove excess media from the input tray. Do not load more
than 200 sheets of glossy paper or glossy film, or more than
100 transparencies, in Tray 2 and optional Tray 3. Do not
exceed the maximum stack height for Tray 1.
Media in another input tray is the same size as the
transparencies, and the printer is defaulting to the other tray.
Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or
glossy paper is selected in the software application or printer
driver. For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer
drivers for Macintosh computers. Use the printer control panel
to configure the tray to the media type loaded.
The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not
configured correctly for type.
Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or
glossy paper is selected in the software application or printer
driver. For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer
drivers for Macintosh computers. Use the printer control panel
to configure the tray to the media type loaded. See Configuring
input trays.
Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported
media specifications.
Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this
printer. See Supported media weights and sizes.
Table 8-5 Media does not feed from Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 (continued)
196 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Envelope printing error
Table 8-7 Envelopes jam or will not feed in the printer
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only Tray 1 can
feed envelopes.
Load envelopes into Tray 1.
Envelopes are curled or damaged. Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled
environment.
Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too
high.
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled
environment.
Envelope orientation is incorrect. Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly. See Configuring
input trays.
This printer does not support the envelopes being used. See Supported media weights and sizes.
Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes. Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes.
Output quality
Table 8-8 Output is curled or wrinkled
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Media does not meet the specifications for this printer. Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this
printer. See Supported media weights and sizes.
Media is damaged or in poor condition. Remove media from the input tray and load media that is in
good condition.
Printer is operating in an excessively humid environment. Verify that the printing environment is within humidity
specifications. See Printer specifications.
You are printing large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a
different pattern.
Media used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed
moisture.
Remove media and replace it with media from a fresh,
unopened package.
Media has poorly cut edges. Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and
then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan media. If the
problem persists, replace the media.
The specific media type was not configured for the tray or
selected in the software.
Configure the software for the media (see the software
documentation). Configure the tray for the media, see
Configuring input trays.
ENWW Media-handling problems 197
Duplexing error
Table 8-9 Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
You are trying to duplex on unsupported media. Verify that the media is supported for duplex printing. See
Supported media weights and sizes.
The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.
The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or
letterhead.
Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the
letterhead or printed side up and the bottom of the page
feeding into the printer. For Tray 2 and optional Tray 3, load
these media printed side down with the top of the page toward
the back of the printer.
198 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Printer response problems
Control panel display is blank
Table 8-10 No display message
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The printer’s on/off button is in the standby position. Verify that the printer is on. Fans might run while the printer is
in standby mode (off).
The printer’s memory DIMMs are defective or installed
incorrectly.
Verify that the printer’s memory DIMMs are correctly installed
and are not defective.
The power cord is not firmly plugged into both the printer and
the power receptacle.
Turn off the printer and then disconnect and reconnect the
power cord. Turn the printer back on.
The line voltage is incorrect for the printer power configuration. Connect the printer to a proper voltage source, as specified on
the Power Rating Label on the back of the printer.
The power cord is damaged or excessively worn. Replace the power cord.
The power source receptacle is not working correctly. Connect the printer to a different power receptacle.
Printer does not print
Table 8-11 Printer is on, but nothing prints
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The printer’s Ready indicator light is not lit. Press Stop to return the printer to the Ready state.
The top cover is not closed properly. Close the top cover firmly.
The Data indicator light is flashing. The printer is probably still receiving data. Wait for the Data
indicator to stop flashing.
REPLACE [COLOR] CARTRIDGE appears on the printer
display.
Replace the print cartridge specified on the printer display.
A printer message other than Ready appears on the printer
control panel.
See Control panel messages.
The output bin is full. Remove some or all of the media in the output bin.
The PS (PostScript Emulation) personality is not selected. Select PS or AUTO for the printer language. For more
information, see Changing printer control panel configuration
settings.
The correct driver is not selected in the software application or
printer driver.
Select the driver for PostScript Emulation for this printer in the
software application or printer driver. For more information,
see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh
computers.
The printer is not properly configured. See Changing printer control panel configuration settings.
ENWW Printer response problems 199
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The computer port is not configured or is not working properly. Run another peripheral connected to this port to verify that the
port is working properly.
The printer has not been correctly named for the network or for
a Macintosh computer.
Use the appropriate utility to name the printer on the network.
Printer not receiving data
Table 8-12 Printer is on, but is not receiving data
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The printer’s Ready indicator light is not lit. Press Stop to return the printer to the Ready state.
The top cover is not closed properly. Close the top cover firmly.
A printer message other than Ready appears on the printer
control panel.
See Control panel messages.
The interface cable is not correct for this configuration. Select the correct interface cable for your configuration. See
HP Jetdirect print servers, or USB configuration.
The interface cable is not securely connected to both the
printer and the computer.
Disconnect and reconnect the interface cable. For Jetdirect
network connections, verify that the Link LED is on. The Link
LED indicates that a proper network connection is established.
The printer is not configured correctly. See Changing printer control panel configuration settings for
configuration information.
The interface configurations on the printer’s configuration page
do not match the configurations on the host computer.
Configure the printer to match the computer configuration.
The computer is not working properly. Try using an application that you know works properly to check
the computer, or, in MS-DOS, type Dir>Prn at the DOS prompt.
The computer port that the printer is connected to is not
configured or is not working properly.
Run another peripheral connected to this port to verify that the
port is working properly.
The printer has not been correctly named for the network or
Macintosh computer.
Use the appropriate utility to name the printer on the network.
Printer selection
Table 8-13 Unable to select the printer from the computer
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
If you are using a switch box, the printer might not be selected
for the computer.
Select the correct printer through the switch box.
The printer’s Ready indicator light is not lit. Press Stop to return the printer to the Ready state.
A printer message other than Ready appears on the printer
control panel.
See Control panel messages.
Table 8-11 Printer is on, but nothing prints (continued)
200 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The correct printer driver is not installed in the computer. Install the correct printer driver. For more information, see
Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
The correct printer and port are not selected on the computer. Select the correct printer and port.
The network is not configured properly for this printer. Use the network software to verify the printer’s network
configuration, or consult with the network administrator.
The power source receptacle is not working correctly. Connect the printer to a different power receptacle.
Table 8-13 Unable to select the printer from the computer (continued)
ENWW Printer response problems 201
Printer control panel problems
Control panel setting
Table 8-14 Control panel settings work incorrectly
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The printer control panel display is blank or is not lit, even when
the fan is running.
Fans might run while the printer is in standby mode (off). Press
the printer’s on/off button to turn the printer on.
Printer settings in the printing software application or printer
driver differ from the printer control panel settings.
Confirm that the settings in the application and printer driver
are appropriate, because the application settings override the
printer driver and control panel settings, and the printer driver
settings override the control panel settings. For more
information, see Printer drivers.
Control panel settings were not correctly saved after they were
changed.
Reselect the control panel settings and then press . An
asterisk (*) should appear to the right of the setting.
The Data indicator light is lit, and there are no pages printing. Buffered data exists in the printer. Press to print the buffered
data using current control panel settings and activate the new
control panel settings.
If the printer is on a network, another user might have changed
printer control panel settings.
Consult the network administrator to coordinate changes to
printer control panel settings.
Selecting optional Tray 3
Table 8-15 Unable to select optional Tray 3
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Optional Tray 3 does not appear as an option on the
configuration page or on the control panel.
Optional Tray 3 appears available only if it is installed. Verify
that the tray is correctly installed.
Optional Tray 3 does not appear as available in the printer
driver.
Verify that the printer driver configuration recognizes optional
Tray 3. For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer
drivers for Macintosh computers.
202 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Incorrect printer output
Incorrect fonts
Table 8-16 Incorrect fonts are printed
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The font has not been correctly selected in the software
application.
Re-select the font in the software application.
The font is not available to the printer. Download the font to the printer or use another font. (In
Windows, the driver does this automatically.)
The correct printer driver is not selected. Select the correct printer driver. For more information, see
Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
Symbol sets
Table 8-17 Unable to print all characters in a symbol set
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The correct font is not selected. Select the correct font.
The correct symbol set is not selected. Select the correct symbol set.
The selected character or symbol is not supported by the
software application.
Use a font that supports the selected character or symbol.
Drifting text
Table 8-18 Drifting text between printouts
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Your software application is not resetting the printer to the top
of the page.
See the documentation for the software or the PCL/PJL
Technical Reference Package for specific information.
Output errors
Table 8-19 Erratic, missing characters or interrupted printout
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The interface cable is of poor quality. Try using a different, higher-quality, IEEE-compliant cable.
The interface cable is loose. Disconnect and reconnect the interface cable.
ENWW Incorrect printer output 203
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The interface cable is damaged or bad. Try using a different interface cable.
The power cable is loose. Disconnect and reconnect the power cable.
You are attempting to print a PCL job with the printer
configured for PostScript Emulation.
From the printer control panel, select the correct printer
personality, and then resend the print job.
You are attempting to print a PostScript job with the printer
configured for PCL.
From the printer control panel, select the correct printer
personality, and then resend the print job.
Partial printout
Table 8-20 Partial printout
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
A memory error message appears on the printer control panel. 1. Free up printer memory by deleting unneeded
downloaded fonts, style sheets, and macros from printer
memory; or
2. Add more memory to the printer.
The file you are printing contains errors. Check the software application verify that the file does not
contain errors. To do so:
1. Print another file that you know is error-free from within
the same application; or
2. Print the file from another application.
Guidelines for printing with different fonts
●The 80 internal fonts are available in PostScript Emulation (PS) and PCL mode.
●To conserve printer memory, download only those fonts that are needed.
●If you require several downloaded fonts, consider installing additional printer memory.
Some software applications automatically download fonts at the beginning of each print job. It might be
possible to configure those applications to download only soft fonts that are not already resident in the
printer.
Table 8-19 Erratic, missing characters or interrupted printout (continued)
204 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Software application problems
System selection through software
Table 8-21 Unable to change system selections through software
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
System software changes are locked out by the printer control
panel.
Consult with your network administrator.
The software application does not support system changes. See the software application documentation.
The correct printer driver is not loaded. Load the correct printer driver. For more information, see
Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
The correct application driver is not loaded. Load the correct application driver.
Font selection from software
Table 8-22 Unable to select a font from the software
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The font is not available to the software application. See the software application documentation.
Color selection from software
Table 8-23 Unable to select colors from the software
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The software application does not support color. See the documentation for the software application.
Color mode is not selected in the software application or
printer driver.
Select Color mode instead of grayscale or monochrome
mode.
The correct printer driver is not loaded. Load the correct printer driver.
ENWW Software application problems 205
Optional Tray 3 and duplexer recognition
Table 8-24 Printer driver does not recognize optional Tray 3 or the duplexer
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The printer driver has not been configured to recognize
optional Tray 3 or the duplexer.
See the printer driver’s online Help for instructions on how to
configure the driver to recognize printer accessories. For more
information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh
computers.
The accessory might not be installed. Verify that the accessory is properly installed.
206 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems
This section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS 9.x or Mac OS X.
Solving problems with Mac OS X.
Table 8-25 Problems with Mac OS X
The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause Solution
The printer software might not have been installed or was installed
incorrectly.
Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for
the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software.
See the getting started guide for instructions.
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt. Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder: Library/
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,
where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide
for instructions.
The printer name, IP address, or Bonjour host name does not appear in the printer list in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause Solution
The printer might not be ready. Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The wrong connection type might be selected. Make sure that USB, IP Printing, or Bonjour is selected, depending
on the type of connection that exists between the printer and the
computer.
The wrong printer name, IP address, or Bonjour host name is being
used.
Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name, IP
address, or Bonjour host name. Verify that the name, IP address, or
Bonjour host name on the configuration page matches the printer
name, IP address, or Bonjour host name in the Print Center or Printer
Setup Utility.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality. Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause Solution
The printer might not be ready. Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The printer software might not have been installed or was installed
incorrectly.
Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for
the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software.
See the getting started guide for instructions.
ENWW Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems 207
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause Solution
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt. Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder: Library/
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,
where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide
for instructions.
The printer might not be ready. Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality. Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted.
Cause Solution
The print queue might be stopped. Restart the print queue. Open print monitor and select Start Jobs.
The wrong printer name or IP address is being used. Another printer
with the same or similar name, IP address, or Bonjour host name
might have received your print job.
Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name, IP
address, or Bonjour host name. Verify that the name, IP address, or
Bonjour host name on the configuration page matches the printer
name, IP address, or Bonjour host name in the Print Center or Printer
Setup Utility.
An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.
Cause Solution
This problem occurs with some programs. ●Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to
the printer before printing.
●Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.
Cause Solution
This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not
installed.
When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple USB
Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this
software is available from the Apple Web site.
Table 8-25 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)
208 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
When connected with a USB cable, the printer does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.
Cause Solution
This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware
component.
Software troubleshooting
●Check that your Macintosh supports USB.
●Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X v10.2,
v10.3, and v10.4.
●Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software
from Apple.
Hardware troubleshooting
●Check that the printer is turned on.
●Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.
●Check that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.
●Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing
power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the
chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host
computer.
●Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are
connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices
from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on
the host computer.
NOTE The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.
Table 8-25 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)
ENWW Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems 209
Color printing problems
Printout color error
Table 8-26 Printing black instead of color
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Color mode is not selected in the software application or
printer driver.
Select Color mode instead of grayscale or monochrome mode
in the software application or printer driver, see Printer
information pages to learn how to print a configuration page.
The correct printer driver is not selected in your software
application.
Select the correct printer driver.
No color appears on the configuration page. Consult your service representative.
The control-panel setting for COLOR SUPPLY OUT is set to
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK, and one of the color print
cartridges is out. The printer continues to print in black only.
Replace the color print cartridge.
The control-panel setting for Restrict Color is set to DISABLE
COLOR, or it is set to COLOR IF ALLOWED and you do not
have permission to print in color.
Change the control-panel setting to ENABLE COLOR.
Incorrect shade
Table 8-27 Incorrect shade
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
The media does not meet the specifications for this printer. For information on media specifications, see Supported media
weights and sizes
You are operating the printer in excessively humid conditions. Verify that the printer’s environment is within humidity
specifications. See Environmental specifications.
NOTE For more information about color quality
problems, see Print quality troubleshooting.
Missing color
Table 8-28 Missing color
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Defective HP print cartridge. Replace the cartridge.
A non-HP cartridge might be installed. Ensure that you are using a genuine HP print cartridge.
210 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Cartridge error
Table 8-29 Inconsistent colors after installing a print cartridge
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Another print cartridge might be low. Check the supplies gauge on the control panel or print a
supplies status page. See Printer information pages.
Print cartridges might be improperly installed. Verify that each print cartridge is installed properly.
A non-HP cartridge might be installed. Ensure that you are using a genuine HP print cartridge.
Color match error
Table 8-30 Printed colors do not match screen colors
Cause and solution
Cause Solution
Extremely light screen colors are not being printed. The software application might interpret extremely light colors
as white. If so, avoid using extremely light colors.
Extremely dark screen colors are being printed in black. The software application might interpret extremely dark colors
as black. If so, avoid using extremely dark colors.
The colors on the computer screen differ from the printer
output.
On the printer driver’s Color Control tab, there are several
options that affect color matching between the screen and the
printed page, such as Color Themes and Color Options. For
more information, see Color matching.
NOTE Several factors can influence your ability to
match printed colors to those on your screen. These
factors include print media, overhead lighting,
software applications, operating system palettes,
monitors, and video cards and drivers.
ENWW Color printing problems 211
Print quality troubleshooting
When occasional print quality problems occur, use the information in this section to help solve the
problem.
Print quality problems associated with media
Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate media.
●Use paper that meets HP paper specifications. See Supported media weights and sizes.
●The surface of the media is too smooth. Use media that meets HP paper specifications. See
Supported media weights and sizes.
●The print driver setting might be incorrect. Be sure that you have selected the correct driver setting
for the paper that you are using.
●The print mode might be set incorrectly, or the paper might not meet recommended specifications.
For more information, see Supported media weights and sizes.
●The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion. Use only
transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet printers.
●The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source
or from an unopened ream of paper.
●Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream
of paper.
●The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. If this
solves your problem, consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets
the specifications for this printer. See Supported media weights and sizes.
●The paper is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic paper.
Overhead transparency defects
Overhead transparencies might display any of the image quality problems that any other type of media
could display, as well as defects specific to transparencies. In addition, because transparencies are
pliable while in the print path, they are subject to being marked by the media-handling components.
NOTE Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them.
●On the printer driver’s Paper tab, select Transparency as the media type. Also, make sure that
the tray is correctly configured for transparencies.
●Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer. See Supported media weights
and sizes.
For ordering information, see Part numbers.
●Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots
and smudges.
●Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies
sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.
212 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
●The selected colors are undesirable when printed. Select different colors in the software application
or printer driver.
●If you are using a reflective overhead projector, use a standard overhead projector instead.
Print quality problems associated with the environment
The printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions. Verify that the printing environment is
within specifications. See Environmental specifications.
Print quality problems associated with jams
●Make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path. See Paper jam recovery.
●The printer recently jammed. Print two to three pages to clean the printer.
●The media does not pass through the fuser causing image defects to appear on subsequent
documents. Print two to three pages to clean the printer. However, if the problem persists see the
next section.
Print quality troubleshooting pages
The print quality troubleshooting pages provide information on aspects of the printer that affect print
quality.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
5. Press to select PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
The message Printing... PQ troubleshooting appears on the display until the printer finishes printing
the print quality troubleshooting information. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the
print quality troubleshooting information.
The print quality troubleshooting information includes one page for each color (black, magenta, cyan,
and yellow), printer statistics related to print quality, instructions on interpreting the information, and
procedures to solve print quality problems.
If following the procedures recommended by the print quality troubleshooting pages do not improve print
quality, go to http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
Print quality troubleshooting tool
The print quality troubleshooting tool helps you identify and troubleshoot print quality issues for the
HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printer. The tool includes solutions for many print quality issues, using
standard images to provide a common diagnostic environment. It is designed to provide intuitive, step-
by-step directions for printing troubleshooting pages that are used to isolate print quality problems and
provide possible solutions.
To find the print quality troubleshooting tool, go to the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/printquality/
cp4005.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting 213
Calibrating the printer
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer automatically calibrates and cleans at various times to
maintain the highest level of print quality. The user might also request the printer to calibrate via the
printer’s control panel, using QUICK CALIBRATE NOW or CALIBRATE NOW located in the PRINT
QUALITY menu. QUICK CALIBRATE NOW is used for color tone calibration and takes about 65
seconds. If color density or tone seems wrong, Quick Calibration can be run. Full Calibration includes
the Quick Calibrate routines and adds Drum Phase Calibration and Color Plane Registration (CPR).
This takes about 4 minutes and 20 seconds. If color layers (black, magenta, cyan, and yellow) on the
printed page seem to be shifted from one another, CALIBRATE NOW should be run.
The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer incorporates a new feature to skip calibration when
appropriate, thereby making the printer available more quickly. For example, if the printer is turned off
and on quickly (within 20 seconds), calibration is not needed and is skipped. In this case, the printer will
reach the Ready state approximately 1 minute sooner.
While the printer is calibrating and cleaning, the printer will pause printing for the amount of time it takes
to complete the calibration or cleaning. For most calibrations and cleaning, the printer will not interrupt
a print job, but will wait for the job to complete before calibrating or cleaning.
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight QUICK CALIBRATE NOW.
7. Press to select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW.
OR
To perform a full calibration, use CALIBRATE NOW instead of QUICK CALIBRATE NOW in steps 6
and 7.
Repetitive defect ruler
If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place
the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect
indicates which component needs to be replaced.
214 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
1First occurrence of the defect (the distance from the top of the page to the defect might vary.
2Print cartridge (34.3 mm (1.35 inches))
3Print cartridge or transfer roller (if the defect occurs in only one color, the defective part is the print cartridge;
if the defect occurs in all colors, the defective part is the ETB) (37.7 mm (1.48 inches))
4Print cartridge (42.7 mm (1.68 inches))
5ETB (75 mm (2.95 inches))
6Fuser (76.0 mm (2.99 inches))
7Fuser (81.0 mm (3.19 inches))
8Print cartridge (94.2 mm (3.71 inches))
To confirm that a print cartridge is the problem, insert a print cartridge from another HP Color LaserJet
CP4005 Series printer, if one is available, before ordering a new print cartridge.
If the defect repeats at 94.0 mm (3.75 inch) intervals, try replacing the print cartridge before replacing
the fuser.
Print quality defect chart
Use the examples in the print quality defect chart to determine which print-quality problem you are
experiencing, and then see the corresponding pages to find information that can help you troubleshoot
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting 215
the problem. For the latest information and problem-solving procedures, go to http://www.hp.com/
support/ljcp4005 and http://www.hp.com/go/printquality/ljcp4005
NOTE The print-quality defect chart assumes the use of letter- or A4-size media that has moved
through the printer short-edge first (portrait orientation).
An image with no defects
Horizontal lines or streaks
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Print quality
troubleshooting) and
follow the diagnostic
procedure listed on the
first page to help isolate
the defect to a particular
component.
Misaligned colors
●Calibrate the printer.
Vertical lines
●Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Print quality
troubleshooting) and
follow the diagnostic
procedure listed on the
first page to help isolate
the defect to a particular
component.
Repetitive defects
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Print quality
troubleshooting) and
follow the diagnostic
procedure listed on the
first page to help isolate
the defect to a particular
component.
216 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
Color fade in all colors
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Calibrate the printer.
Color fade in one color
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Calibrate the printer.
●Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Print quality
troubleshooting) and
follow the diagnostic
procedure listed on the
first page to help isolate
the defect to a particular
component.
Fingerprints and media
dents
●Make sure to use
supported media.
●Make sure that the
media you are using
does not have any
wrinkles or dents from
handling, and that the
media is not
contaminated with
visible fingerprints or
other foreign
substances.
●Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Print quality
troubleshooting) and
follow the diagnostic
procedure listed on the
first page to help isolate
the defect to a particular
component.
Loose toner
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Make sure to use
supported media.
●Make sure that the
media type and size for
the tray are set correctly
in the control panel for
the media that you are
using.
●Make sure that the
media is loaded correctly
and that the size guides
are touching the edges
of the stack of media.
Make sure that the
media you are using
does not have any
wrinkles or dents from
handling, and that the
media is not
contaminated with
visible fingerprints or
other foreign
substances.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting 217
Smeared toner
●Make sure to use
supported media.
White areas (dropouts) on
page
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Make sure to use
supported media.
●Make sure that the
media you are using
does not have any
wrinkles or dents from
handling, and that the
media is not
contaminated with
visible fingerprints or
other foreign
substances.
●Make sure that the
media type and size for
the tray are set correctly
in the control panel for
the media that you are
using.
●Calibrate the printer.
●Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Print quality
troubleshooting) and
follow the diagnostic
procedure listed on the
first page to help isolate
the defect to a particular
component.
Media damage (wrinkles,
curl, creases, tears)
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Make sure to use
supported media.
●Make sure that the
media is loaded
correctly.
●Make sure that the
media type and size for
the tray are set correctly
in the control panel for
the media that you are
using.
●Make sure that the
media you are using
does not have any
Specks or stray toner
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Make sure to use
supported media.
●Make sure that the
media type and size for
the tray are set correctly
in the control panel for
the media that you are
using.
●Calibrate the printer.
●Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Print quality
troubleshooting) and
follow the diagnostic
procedure listed on the
218 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
wrinkles or dents from
handling, and that the
media is not
contaminated with
visible fingerprints or
other foreign
substances.
●Make sure that the
following supplies are
seated correctly:
●fuser
●transfer belt
●Inspect the jam areas
and remove any
undetected jammed or
torn media.
first page to help isolate
the defect to a particular
component.
Skewed, stretched, or off-
center page
●Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the
printer are met.
●Make sure to use
supported media.
●Make sure that the
media is loaded
correctly.
●For problems with page
skew, turn over the stack
of media and rotate the
stack 180 degrees.
●Make sure that the
following supplies are
seated correctly:
●fuser
●transfer belt
●Inspect the jam areas
and remove any
undetected jammed or
torn media.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting 219
220 Chapter 8 Problem solving ENWW
A Working with memory
ENWW 221
Printer memory
You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PS documents,
or use many downloaded fonts. Additional memory also allows the printer to print multiple, collated
copies at the maximum speed.
To accommodate memory expansion, the available 200-pin small outline dual inline memory module
(SODIMM) can be upgraded to a maximum of 512 MB of memory. DDR SDRAM memory is available
in 128, 256, and 512 MB modules.
NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers use 200-pin small
outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128, 256, or 512 MB of RAM.
The printer has one flash memory card slot for printer firmware.
●The flash memory card is reserved for printer firmware.
NOTE Use the flash memory card slot for firmware only. The slot is marked "Firmware
Slot".
NOTE Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) and dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs), used
on previous HP LaserJet printer, are not compatible with this printer.
NOTE To order SODIMMs, see Supplies and accessories.
Before ordering additional memory, see how much memory is currently installed by printing a
configuration page.
Printing a configuration page
1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5. Press to print the configuration page.
222 Appendix A Working with memory ENWW
Installing memory
You can install more memory for the printer.
CAUTION Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an
antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then
touch bare metal on the printer.
Installing DDR memory DIMMs
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.
ENWW Installing memory 223
3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.
4. Grasp the black tabs situated near the top and bottom of the formatter board.
224 Appendix A Working with memory ENWW
5. Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the printer. Place the formatter board
on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
6. To replace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the
DIMM slot, lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.
7. Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom
edge of the DIMM.
ENWW Installing memory 225
8. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an
angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the
metal contacts are not visible.
9. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.
NOTE If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom of the
DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure you are
using the correct type of DIMM.
226 Appendix A Working with memory ENWW
10. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board
back into the printer.
11. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.
12. If you installed a memory DIMM, go to Enabling memory.
ENWW Installing memory 227
Enabling memory
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory.
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and Windows XP
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section).
4. Select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5. Click OK.
228 Appendix A Working with memory ENWW
B Supplies and accessories
To order supplies in the U.S., contact http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. To order supplies worldwide,
see http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To order accessories, see http://www.hp.com/go/
accessories.
ENWW 229
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for
printers with network connections)
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server (see Using
the embedded Web server.)
1. In the Web browser on the computer, enter the IP address for the printer. The printer status window
appears. Or, go to the URL provided in the alert e-mail.
2. Click Other Links.
3. Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to a page in which you can choose to send information
about the printer to HP. You also have the option to order supplies without sending the printer’s
information to HP.
4. Select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen.
230 Appendix B Supplies and accessories ENWW
Part numbers
To order supplies through the embedded Web server, select the part numbers you want to order and
follow the instructions on the screen.
Supplies, accessories, and part numbers
Part Part number Type/size
Memory Q7721A DIMM 128-MB DDR 200-pin SDRAM
Q7722A DIMM 256-MB DDR 200-pin SDRAM
Q7723A DIMM 512-MB DDR 200-pin SDRAM
Accessories Q7501A Printer stand
Q7499A Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3)
Printer supplies CB400A HP black print cartridge with
ColorSphere toner
CB401A HP cyan print cartridge with ColorSphere
toner
CB402A HP yellow print cartridge with
ColorSphere toner
CB403A HP magenta print cartridge with
ColorSphere toner
Q7504A Image transfer (ETB) kit
Q7502A Image fuser kit (110 volt)
Q7503A Image fuser kit (220 volt)
Cables C6518A HP USB 2.0 printer cable a-b, 2 meter (6
feet)
Media Q6541A HP Color Laser Soft Gloss Presentation
Paper (letter), 200 sheets
Q6542A HP Professional 120 Soft Gloss Laser
Paper (A4), 200 sheets
Q1298A HP LaserJet Tough Paper (letter)
Q1298B HP Superior 165 Satin Matt Laser Paper
(A4)
HPU1132 HP Premium Choice LaserJet Paper
(letter)
CHP410 HP Premium Choice LaserJet Paper
(A4)
HPJ1124 HP LaserJet Paper (letter)
CHP310 HP LaserJet Paper (A4)
Q2413A HP Premium Cover Paper (letter), 100
sheets
Q6545A HP Laser Gloss Photo/Image Paper
(letter)
ENWW Part numbers 231
Part Part number Type/size
Q6547A HP Professional 120 Glossy Laser Paper
(A4)
Q6607A HP Color Laser Glossy Photo Paper
(letter), 200 sheets
Q6614A HP Photo 220 Glossy Laser Paper (A4),
100 sheets
Q6610A HP Color Laser Brochure Paper (letter),
250 sheets
Q6616A HP Superior 160 Glossy Laser Paper
(A4), 150 sheets
C2934A HP Color Laser Transparencies (letter),
50 sheets
C2936A HP Color Laser Transparencies (A4), 50
sheets
Reference materials CB503-90901 HP Color LaserJet CP4005 User Guide
For downloadable versions, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
When connected, select Manuals.
CB503-90931 HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Getting
Started Guide
For downloadable versions, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
When connected, select Manuals.
Q7499-90901 500-sheet Tray Install Guide
For downloadable versions, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
When connected, select Manuals.
Q7504-90902 ETB Kit Install Guide
For downloadable versions, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
When connected, select Manuals.
Q7502-90902 110V/220V Fuser Install Guide
For downloadable versions, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
When connected, select Manuals.
5851-2977 Formatter Install Guide
For downloadable versions, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
When connected, select Manuals.
5851-2978 Roller Kit Install Guide
For downloadable versions, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
When connected, select Manuals.
Q7501–90901 Printer Stand Install Guide
232 Appendix B Supplies and accessories ENWW
Part Part number Type/size
For downloadable versions, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005.
When connected, select Manuals
ENWW Part numbers 233
234 Appendix B Supplies and accessories ENWW
C Service and Support
ENWW 235
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
HP Color LaserJet CP4005n and CP4005dn One-year limited warranty
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials
and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects
during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase,
for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If
HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute
its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of
the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to
incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b)
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation
outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or
maintenance.
HP’s limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product
and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local
standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it
was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW,
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER
WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of
an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or
province to province.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
236 Appendix C Service and Support ENWW
Print cartridge limited warranty statement
This HP Print Cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to print cartridges that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured
or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear
from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of
the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace
products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
ENWW Print cartridge limited warranty statement 237
Fuser and transfer unit limited warranty statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer
provides a low-life indicator on the control panel.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered
with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside
of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary
use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of
the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove
to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
238 Appendix C Service and Support ENWW
HP maintenance agreements
HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs.
Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services may vary by area.
Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you.
On-site service agreements
To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs, HP has on-site service agreements
with three response times:
Priority on-site service
This agreement provides 4-hour service response to your site for calls made during normal HP business
hours.
Next-day on-site service
This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request. Extended
coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP’s designated service zones are available on most on-
site agreements (for additional charges).
Weekly (volume) on-site service
This agreement provides scheduled weekly on-site visits for organizations with many HP products. This
agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products, including printers, plotters,
computers, and disk drives.
ENWW HP maintenance agreements 239
240 Appendix C Service and Support ENWW
D Printer specifications
ENWW 241
Physical dimensions
Table D-1 Physical dimensions
Product Height Depth Width Weight
HP Color LaserJet
CP4005n
582 mm (22.9 in.) 598 mm (23.5 in.) 521 mm (20.5 in.) 47.7 kg (105.1 lb.)
HP Color LaserJet
CP4005dn with
duplexer
628.6 mm (24.7 in.) 598 mm (23.5 in.) 521 mm (20.5 in.) 48.9 kg (107.8 lb.)
HP Color LaserJet
CP4005n with optional
Tray 3
1010.6 mm (39.8 in.) 715 mm (28.2 in.) 630 mm (24.8 in.) 104.3 kg (230 lb.)
HP Color LaserJet
CP4005dn with
optional Tray 3 and
duplexer
1375.5 mm (54.2 in.) 715 mm (28.2 in.) 630 mm (24.8 in.) 130.5 kg (287.7 lb.)
Optional paper Tray 3 117 mm (4.6 in.) 578 mm (22.8 in.) 514 mm (20.25 in.) 8.9 kg (19.6 lb.)
Printer stand 148 mm (5.8 in.) 715 mm (28.2 in.) 630 mm (24.8 in.) 37.6 kg (83 lb.)
242 Appendix D Printer specifications ENWW
Electrical specifications
110-Volt models 220-Volt models
Power requirements 100-127V (+/- 10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
220-240V (+/- 10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
Rated current 8 Amps 4 Amps
Table D-2 Power consumption (average, in watts)
1
Power consumption (average, in watts)
Product model Printing (31 ppm
letter)2
Ready3, 4 Sleep5Off
HP Color LaserJet
CP4005n
567 55 17 0.3
HP Color LaserJet
CP4005dn
567 55 17 0.3
NOTE
1
Values are subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005 for current
information.
2
Power reported is the highest value measured using all standard voltages.
3
Maximum heat dissipation for all models in Ready mode is 225 BTU/hour.
4
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep mode is 30 minutes.
5
Recovery time from Sleep mode to start of printing is less than 15 seconds.
ENWW Electrical specifications 243
Acoustic emissions
Sound Power Level Declared Per ISO 9296
Printing (31 ppm letter)1, 2, 3
Ready
LWAd=6.7 Bels (A) [67 dB (A)]
LWAd=4.7 Bels (A) [47 dB (A)]
Sound Pressure Level - Bystander Position Declared Per ISO 9296
Printing (31 ppm letter)1, 2, 3
Ready
LpAm=50 dB (A)
LpAm=31 dB (A)
NOTE
1
Values are subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005 for current
information.
2
Configuration tested: Base printer, simplex printing on A4 paper.
3
HP Color LaserJet CP4005 speed: 30 ppm black and 25 ppm color.
244 Appendix D Printer specifications ENWW
Environmental specifications
Specification Recommended Allowed
Temperature 17 to 25°C (62.6 to 77°F) 15 to 30°C (59 to 86°F)
Humidity 30 to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10 to 80% RH
Altitude N/A 0 to 2600 m (0 to 8530 ft)
ENWW Environmental specifications 245
246 Appendix D Printer specifications ENWW
E Regulatory information
ENWW 247
FCC regulations
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
●Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
●Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
NOTE Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could
void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC
rules. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, or
other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information.
248 Appendix E Regulatory information ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O
3
).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready/Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves
money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR®
qualification status for this product see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified
products are also listed at:
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdesign/ecolabels.html
Paper use
This product’s manual/optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple
pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural
resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet print supplies
It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet
Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print
cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return
multiple cartridges together rather than separately.
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally
sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you
participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled
properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons
of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be
returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
NOTE Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not
use this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges
or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to
http://www.hp.com/recycle.
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 249
Return and recycling instructions
United States and Puerto Rico
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more
HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.
Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges)
1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.
2. Tape up to eight single boxes together using strapping or packaging tape (up to 70 lbs).
3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
OR
1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from the http://www.hp.com/
recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to eight HP LaserJet print cartridges).
2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
Single returns
1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.
2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box.
Shipping
For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery
or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off
center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit http://www.ups.com. If you are returning via USPS label, give the
package to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S.Postal Service Office. For more information,
or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle or call
1-800-340-2445. Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to
change without notice.
Non-US returns
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in
the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new printer supply item) or visit
http://www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet
printing supplies.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper
according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product does not contain added mercury.
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries
contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:
250 Appendix E Regulatory information ENWW
HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series
Type Carbon monofluoride lithium battery
Weight 0.8 grams
Location Formatter board
User-removable No
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the
European Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with
your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by
handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where
you purchased the product.
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner)
can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/
community/environment/productinfo/safety.
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 251
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
●Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●HP’s commitment to the environment
●HP’s environmental management system
●HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
●Material Safety Data Sheets
Visit http://www.hp.com/go/environment or http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/
productinfo/safety.
252 Appendix E Regulatory information ENWW
Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name: Hewlett-Packard Company
Manufacturer’s Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name: HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series
including accessories: Q7499A-Optional 1x500 Sheet Paper Tray
Regulatory Model Number2:BOISB-0404-00
Product Options: All
Toner Cartridge: CB400A, CB401A, CB402A, CB403A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety: IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1:2001
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1 + A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 + A11 + A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
EMC: CISPR 22:1993 / EN 55022:1994 +A1, +A2-Class B1
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2001
EN 55024:1998+A1 amendment
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B / ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries
the CE-Marking accordingly.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name
or the product number(s).
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
03 July, 2006
For regulatory topics only:
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE/Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact: Product Relations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, USA,
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
ENWW Declaration of Conformity 253
Safety statements
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is certified as a "Class 1" laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the
printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot
escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those
specified in this user guide could result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
« Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques « CEM ». »
EMI statement (Korea)
VCCI statement (Japan)
AC cordset statement (Japan)
254 Appendix E Regulatory information ENWW
Laser Statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP Color LaserJet CP4005n, CP4005dn -laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen
luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen
pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1
(1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren
utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP Color LaserJet CP4005n, CP4005dn -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa
olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö.
Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan
puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja
ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen
ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för
osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin
säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm
Teho 5 m W
Luokan 3B laser
ENWW Safety statements 255
256 Appendix E Regulatory information ENWW
Glossary
bidirectional communication Two-way data transmission.
bin A receptacle for holding printed pages.
BOOTP Abbreviation for "Bootstrap Protocol," an Internet protocol that allows a networked computer or
peripheral to automatically obtain its IP configuration from a BOOTP server.
CMYK An acronym for colors "cyan, magenta, yellow, and black."
control panel The area on the printer that contains buttons and a display screen. Use the control panel to set
printer settings and to get information about the printer’s status.
DDR Acronym for double data-rate.
default The normal or standard setting for hardware or software.
DHCP An acronym for "dynamic host configuration protocol." DHCP enables individual computers or peripherals
connected to a network to automatically obtain their IP configuration from a DHCP server.
DIMM An acronym for "dual in-line memory module." A small circuit board that holds memory chips.
duplex A feature that allows printing on both sides of a sheet of paper.
EIO An acronym for "Enhanced Input/Output." A hardware interface used for adding an internal print server,
network adaptor, hard disk, and other plug-in functionality for HP printers.
embedded Web server A server that is completely contained within a device. Embedded Web servers provide
management information about the device. They are helpful for managing single devices on a small network. By
using a Web browser to access an embedded Web server, network users can obtain network printer status
updates, perform simple troubleshooting operations, change device configuration settings, and link to online
customer support. When you need to manage many network devices, it is more effective to use an integrated Web
server management tool, such as HP Web Jetadmin.
Emulated PostScript Software that emulates Adobe PostScript, a programming language that describes the
appearance of the printed page.
firmware Programming instructions that are stored in a read-only memory unit inside the printer.
Flash memory card A small-sized, high-quality, removable memory card.
font A complete set of letters, numerals, and symbols in a typeface.
fuser The assembly that uses heat to fuse the toner onto the paper or other media.
grayscale Various shades of gray.
halftone pattern A halftone pattern uses differing sizes of ink dots to produce a continuous-tone image such as
a photograph.
ENWW Glossary 257
HP Jetdirect HP product for network printing.
HP Web Jetadmin HP trademarked device management software that lets you manage a single printer or
multiple printers using a Web browser.
I/O An acronym for "input/output" and refers to computer port settings.
IP address The unique number assigned to a computer device connected to a network.
macro A single keystroke or command that results in a Series of actions or instructions.
media The paper, labels, transparencies, or other material on which the printer prints the image.
memory tag A memory partition with a specific address.
MIME An acronym for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions.
monochrome Black and white. Devoid of color.
mopy The HP term for "multiple original prints" capability.
network A system of computers interconnected by telephone wires or other means in order to share information.
network administrator A person who manages a network.
page buffer Temporary printer memory used to hold page data while the printer creates an image of the page.
PCL An acronym for "Printer Control Language."
PDF An acronym for Portable Document Format. The native file format for Adobe Systems Incorporated Acrobat.
PDF is the file format for representing documents in a manner that is independent of the original application
software, hardware, and operating system used to create those documents.
peripheral An auxiliary device, such as a printer, modem, or storage system, that works in conjunction with a
computer.
personality Distinctive features or characteristics of a printer or printer language.
pixel Abbreviation for "picture element," which is the smallest unit of area in an image displayed on a screen.
PJL An acronym for "Printer Job Language."
PostScript A trademarked page description language.
PPD An acronym for "PostScript Printer Description."
Print Task Quick Set A feature of the printer driver that allows you to save the current printer driver settings (for
example: page orientation, two-sided printing, and paper sources) for reuse.
printer driver Software program that allows a computer to access printer features.
RAM An acronym for "random access memory," a type of computer memory used to store data that may change.
RARP An acronym for "Reverse Address Resolution Protocol," a protocol that enables a computer or peripheral
to determine its own IP address.
raster image An image composed of dots.
render The process of outputting text or graphics.
RGB An acronym for colors red, green, and blue.
258 Glossary ENWW
ROM An acronym for "read-only memory," a type of computer memory used to store data that should not be
changed.
supplies Materials that the printer uses up and that must be replaced. Supply items for the HP Color LaserJet
CP4005 Series printer are the four print cartridges, the transfer belt, and the fuser.
TCP/IP An internet protocol (developed by the U.S. Department of Defense) that has become the global standard
for communications.
toner The fine black or colored powder that forms the image on the printed media.
transfer unit The black plastic belt that transports the media inside the printer and transfers the toner from the
print cartridges onto the media.
tray A receptacle for holding blank media.
xerographic paper General term for paper intended for photocopy or laser printer use.
XHTML An acronym for extensible hypertext markup language.
ENWW Glossary 259
260 Glossary ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
2-sided printing 110
A
accessories
ordering 229
accessory port 73
address, printer
Macintosh,
troubleshooting 207
alerts
configuring 152
e-mail 127
auto continue 62
autocontinue black 210
automatic media sensing 81
B
batteries included 250
booklets
printing 113
both sides, printing on 102, 107
C
canceling print job 115
cartridges
recycling 249
cleaning page
using 149
clearable warnings
setting display time 61
clearing jams 189, 191
clock
setting 128
CMYK samples
printing 124
color
adjusting 136
CMYK ink set emulation 133
edge control 137, 140
four-color printing 133
halftone options 137, 139
HP ImageREt 3600 132
managing options 136, 139
matching 134
neutral grays 138, 139
options 132
printed vs. monitor 134
printing color samples 134
printing in grayscale 136, 139
sample book matching 134
sRGB 132
using 132
color options
configuring 54
color supply out
reporting 63
solution for 210
Color tab settings 104, 108
color/black mix 54
configuration page
printing 122, 156
viewing with embedded Web
server 127
configure device menu 39, 45
configuring
alerts 152
configuring trays
custom paper size 85
from paper handling menu 84
control panel
accessing from computer 34
blank display 199
buttons 32, 35
configuring 54
display 32
lights 32, 36
menus 37, 38
overview 31, 32
printer personalities 61
problems 202
using in shared
environments 67
control panel display
options 60
control panel messages 159
controlling print jobs 78
cover pages 101, 106
covers 106
custom paper sizes
driver settings 101
D
Declaration of Conformity 253
demo page
printing 124
diagnostics menu 53
DIMMs (dual inline memory
modules)
installing 223
display brightness
setting 60
disposal, end-of-life 250
double-sided printing 102, 103,
107, 108, 110
driver autoconfiguration 9
drivers
accessing 17, 19
Help 17
Macintosh,
troubleshooting 207
presets 106
quick sets 99
selecting 17
duplex printing
binding options 112
control panel settings 111
manual 112
duplex-printing accessory
loading 102, 107
ENWW Index 261
duplexing 102, 107
E
e-mail alerts 127
embedded Web server
checking toner level 143
description 14
ordering supplies 230
using 126
using to configure alerts 152
end-of-life disposal 250
enlarging documents 100
envelopes
jams 197
loading in Tray 1 87
printing 87
environmental features 5
EPS files, troubleshooting 208
errors
auto continue 62
European Union, waste
disposal 251
event log
printing 125
viewing 127
F
FCC regulations 248
file directory page
printing 125
first page
blank 101
use different paper 101
first page, use different
paper 106
font list
printing 125
fonts
EPS files, troubleshooting 208
G
grayscale printing 136, 139
H
Help, printer-driver 17
host USB 73
HP customer care iii
HP Easy Printer Care Software
checking toner level 143
using 13, 129
HP fraud hotline 142
HP Jetdirect print servers
configuring 127
HP Web Jetadmin
checking toner level 143
using to configure alerts 152
I
I/O (input/output) menu 51
I/O configuration
network configuration 70
IEEE 802.11b standard 75
information menu 43
information pages
CMYK samples page 124
configuration page 122
demo page 124
event log 125
file directory 125
menu map 122
PCL font list 125
PS font list 125
RGB samples 124
supplies status page 123
usage page 123
input trays
capacities 28
configuring 44, 55, 83
internal clock 128
IP address
displaying 54
Macintosh,
troubleshooting 207
J
jam recovery
setting 64
jams
common causes 185
configuring alerts 152
envelopes 197
locations 183
recovery 183
top cover area 189
Jetdirect print servers
configuring 127
job storage 5, 116
L
language
changing 65
embedded Web server 127
selecting 65
lights 36
links
information 2
Linux drivers 16
M
Macintosh
drivers, accessing 19
drivers, troubleshooting 207
problems,
troubleshooting 207
USB card,
troubleshooting 208
maintenance
agreements 239
material restrictions 250
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 251
media
automatic sensing 81
custom sizes, setting 101
document size, selecting 100
firs page 106
first page 101
loading Tray 2 and optional Tray
3 89, 91, 93
maximum size 6
pages per sheet 101, 107
type 6
weight 6
memory
adding 120, 221
enabling 228
managing 120
menu map
description 43
printing 122
menus
configure device 45
diagnostics 53
hierarchy 38
I/O (input/output) 51
information 43
paper handling 44
print quality 46
printing 45
resets 51
262 Index ENWW
retrieve job 42
system setup 48
mercury-free product 250
message types 158
messages
critical 158
error 158
status 158
warning 158
mopier mode 118
multiple pages per sheet 101,
107
N
n-up printing 101, 107
networks
administrative tools 15
configuring 70
configuring with embedded Web
server 128
default gateway 72
IP address 70
software 12
subnet mask 71
TCP/IP parameters 70
O
order at
supplies 63
P
pages per sheet 101, 107
paper
custom sizes, setting 101
document size, selecting 100
first page 101, 106
pages per sheet 101, 107
paper handling 6
paper handling menu 44
paper path test page
printing 156
paper specifications 28
passwords
network 127
PCL drivers
selecting 17
PCL font list 125
personality
setting 61
PIN (personal identification
number)
private jobs 117
ports
troubleshooting
Macintosh 208
preconfiguration 9
presets 106
print cartridge
authentication 142
checking toner levels 143
genuine HP 142
life expectancy 143
managing 142
non-HP 142
replacing 144
storing 143
print cartridges
recycling 249
Print Document On 100
print media
colored paper 96
envelopes 96
for color printing 132
glossy paper 95
heavy paper 96
labels 96
letterhead 97
media to avoid 80
preprinted forms 97
printing from Tray 1 86
recycled paper 98
selecting 80
specifications 28
supported sizes 28
supported types 28
supported weights 28
Tough paper 97
transparencies 95
print quality
diagnosing problems 215
print quality defects 215
repetitive defect ruler 214
print quality menu 46
print servers
configuring 127
Printer 6
printer
accessories 6
connectivity 6
drivers 16, 19
fonts 6
maintenance 141
managing 121
performance 5
personalities 5
printer basics 1
printer components
locating 7
printer configurations 4, 54
printer driver
Services tab 105
printer features
walk around 7
printer information
access 2
printer information pages
troubleshooting 156
printer personalities 61
printer settings
configure 45
printer software 9
printer supplies 6
printing
booklets 113
canceling 115
special media 95
special situations 114
printing envelopes 87
printing from optional trays 88
printing from Tray 2 88
printing menu 45
printing tasks 77
private jobs
deleting 118
printing 117
problem solving 153
product stewardship 249
PS drivers
selecting 17
Q
quick sets 99
R
RAM (random access memory) 5
RAM disk
setting behavior 65
ENWW Index 263
recycling
HP printing supplies returns and
environmental program 250
reducing documents 100
registration page
printing 157
regulations
FCC 248
replace color supplies
reporting 62
resets menu 51
resizing documents 100
restricting color printing 128,
138, 210
retrieve job menu 42
RGB samples
printing 124
S
safety statements
AC cordset (Japan) 254
Canadian DOC 254
Japanese VCCI 254
Korean EMI 254
laser safety 254
laser safety for Finland 255
scaling documents 100
security page 127
servers
configuring 127
service
agreements 239
Services tab 105
settings
driver presets 106
embedded Web server 127
quick sets 99
show address 54
sleep delay
changing settings 58
disabling 59
enabling 59
time 58
sleep mode 58
software
applications 14
HP Easy Printer Care 13
installing 10
macintosh 21
networks 12
uninstalling 12
utilities 13
special media
printing 95
special situations
blank back cover 114
custom-sized media 114
different first page 114
printing 114
specifications
acoustic 244
dimensions 242
electrical 243
humidity 245
temperature 245
status
e-mail alerts 127
stopping a print request 115
storing jobs
deleting 116
printing 116
private jobs 117
proof and hold jobs 116
subnet mask 71
supplies
locating 147
ordering 229
recycling 249
replacement intervals 148
replacing 147
status 127
status page 127
supplies low
configuring alerts 152
ordering reminder 63
supplies out
configuring alerts 152
supplies status page
description 43
printing 123
system setup menu 48
T
tray 1 103, 108
tray behavior 55
trays
double-sided printing 103,
108
troubleshooting
checklist 154
color printing problems 210
control panel problems 202
duplexing 198
EPS files 208
incorrect printer output 203
jams 183
Macintosh problems 207
media handling problems 194
overhead transparencies 212
print quality 212
printer response 199
software applications 205
transparencies 196
two-sided printing
control panel settings 111
manual 112
U
Update Now 9
usage page
description 43
printing 123
USB configuration 73
USB port
troubleshooting
Macintosh 208
Use Different Paper/Covers 101
user interface 5
W
Wake time
changing 59
wake time
setting 59
warranty
print cartridge 237
product 235, 236
transfer unit 238
watermarks
cover page 106
Web sites
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 251
Windows
drivers, accessing 17
wireless printing
802.11b standard 75
Bluetooth 75
264 Index ENWW
© 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*CB503-90901*
*CB503-90901*
CB503-90901

Navigation menu